Page 1 ® R&S EMI Test Receiver User Manual (;ÙÔÒ2) 1175706802...
Page 2 This manual covers the following products: ● R&S ESR3 (1316.3003.03) ● R&S ESR7 (1316.3003.07) ● R&S ESR26 (1316.3003.26) ● R&S FSV-B9 ● R&S ESR-B50 (1316.3584.02) ● R&S ESR-K53 (1316.3590.02) ● R&S ESR-K56 (1316.3610.02) The contents of this manual correspond to firmware version 3.46 or higher. ©...
Page 3 Safety Instructions Instrucciones de seguridad Sicherheitshinweise Consignes de sécurité Risk of injury and instrument damage The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent personal injury or instrument damage. ● Do not open the instrument casing. ● Read and observe the "Basic Safety Instructions" delivered as printed brochure with the instrument.
Page 4 Gefahr von Verletzungen und Schäden am Gerät Betreiben Sie das Gerät immer ordnungsgemäß, um elektrischen Schlag, Brand, Verletzungen von Personen oder Geräteschäden zu verhindern. ● Öffnen Sie das Gerätegehäuse nicht. ● Lesen und beachten Sie die "Grundlegenden Sicherheitshinweise", die als gedruckte Broschüre dem Gerät beiliegen. ●...
Page 5 Customer Support Technical support – where and when you need it For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde &...
Page 6: Table Of Contents
® Contents R&S Contents 1 Preface....................21 For Your Safety......................21 Conventions Used in the Documentation..............21 1.2.1 Typographical Conventions...................21 1.2.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions...............22 1.2.3 Notes on Screenshots....................22 How to Use the Help System..................22 2 Documentation Overview..............25 Getting Started Manual....................25 User Manuals and Help....................25 Service Manual......................
Page 7 ® Contents R&S 3.2.1.4 Connecting the AC Power.....................42 3.2.1.5 Changing the AC Supply Fuse..................43 3.2.1.6 Using an Optional DC Power Supply................43 3.2.1.7 Switching the Instrument On and Off................44 3.2.1.8 Maintenance........................45 3.2.1.9 Performing a Self Alignment and a Self Test..............45 3.2.1.10 Checking the Supplied Options..................46 3.2.2...
Page 8 ® Contents R&S 3.4.2 Means of User Interaction..................... 70 3.4.2.1 Toolbar.......................... 70 3.4.2.2 Touchscreen........................72 3.4.2.3 On-screen Keyboard..................... 72 3.4.2.4 Keypad.......................... 73 3.4.2.5 Rotary Knob........................74 3.4.2.6 Arrow Keys, UNDO/REDO Keys...................74 3.4.2.7 Softkeys........................75 3.4.2.8 Context-sensitive Menus....................76 3.4.2.9 Dialog Boxes......................... 77 3.4.3 Setting Parameters.......................
Page 9 ® Contents R&S 3.5.3.2 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier (Span > 0)....103 3.5.3.3 Measuring AM-Modulated Signals................104 3.5.4 Measurements in Zero Span..................106 3.5.4.1 Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals..........106 3.5.4.2 Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals..........110 3.5.4.3 Measuring FM-Modulated Signals................113 3.5.5...
Page 10 ® Contents R&S Measurements and Result Displays................142 5.1.1 Bargraph Measurement....................142 5.1.2 IF Spectrum Analysis....................143 5.1.3 Scans.......................... 144 5.1.3.1 Stepped Scans in the Frequency Domain..............145 5.1.3.2 Time Domain Scans in the Frequency Domain............146 5.1.3.3 The Scan Table......................146 5.1.3.4 Scan on a Fixed Frequency..................
Page 11 ® Contents R&S 5.3.2 Configuring the Level Display and the RF Input............181 5.3.3 Selecting the Bandwidth....................184 5.3.4 Configuring the Scan....................185 5.3.5 Configuring the Trigger ....................186 5.3.6 Controlling Inputs and Outputs..................187 5.3.7 Test Automation......................188 5.3.7.1 Overview ........................188 5.3.7.2 Scan Table........................189 5.3.7.3 Peak Search........................192 5.3.7.4...
Page 12 ® Contents R&S 6.1.1.3 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio................. 249 6.1.1.4 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth................252 6.1.1.5 Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks..............256 6.1.1.6 Measuring Spurious Emissions...................283 6.1.1.7 Measuring the Power in Zero Span................294 6.1.1.8 Performing EMI Measurements.................. 297 6.1.1.9 CISPR APD Measurement (Amplitude Probability Distribution)........307 6.1.1.10 Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics...............
Page 13 ® Contents R&S 6.2.6.1 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu.................360 6.2.6.2 Specifying the Bandwidth....................366 6.2.6.3 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type................366 6.2.6.4 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters..............367 6.2.7 Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key..............369 6.2.7.1 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu..................369 6.2.7.2 Specifying the Sweep Settings..................374 6.2.8...
Page 14 ® Contents R&S 6.4.2 Measurement of Harmonics..................431 6.4.3 Measuring the Spectra of Complex Signals..............433 6.4.3.1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth..... 433 6.4.3.2 Intermodulation Measurements...................434 6.4.4 Measuring Signals in the Vicinity of Noise..............436 6.4.4.1 Measurement Example – Measuring Level at Low S/N Ratios........437 6.4.5 Noise Measurements....................
Page 15 ® Contents R&S 8.4.6 Modulation (internal Tracking Generator only)............498 Displayed Information and Errors................500 9 System Configuration................502 Manual Operation – Local Menu................502 User-Defined Menu – USER key................503 Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key....... 504 9.3.1 Softkeys of the Setup Menu..................
Page 16 ® Contents R&S 11.1.4.6 Responses to Queries....................571 11.1.5 Command Sequence and Synchronization..............572 11.1.5.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution................573 11.1.6 Status Reporting System.................... 574 11.1.6.1 Hierarchy of Status Registers..................574 11.1.6.2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register................575 11.1.6.3 Contents of the Status Register.................. 577 11.1.6.4 Application of the Status Reporting System..............589 11.1.6.5...
Page 17 ® Contents R&S 11.2.8.2 Creating Users......................632 11.2.8.3 Changing the User Password..................633 11.2.8.4 Mapping Network Drives..................... 633 11.2.8.5 Sharing Directories (only with Microsoft Networks).............635 11.3 Selecting the Operating Mode................. 635 11.4 Remote Commands in Receiver Mode..............636 11.4.1 Measurements and Result Displays................637 11.4.1.1 Display Configuration....................
Page 18 ® Contents R&S 11.4.8.3 Using Limit Lines......................705 11.5 Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode..........719 11.5.1 Measurements and Result Displays................719 11.5.1.1 Controlling Power Measurements................719 11.5.1.2 Measuring Channel Power..................727 11.5.1.3 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth................748 11.5.1.4 Measuring Spurious Emissions...................749 11.5.1.5 Testing Against a Spectrum Emission Mask...............
Page 19 ® Contents R&S 11.7 Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator........900 11.7.1 Controlling the Internal Tracking Generator..............900 11.7.2 Controlling the External Tracking Generator............... 907 11.8 Common Commands....................915 11.9 System Configuration....................919 11.9.1 General System Configuration..................919 11.9.2 Checking the System Configuration................924 11.9.3 Coupling Parameters....................
Page 20 ® Contents R&S 11.15.2 Emulating HP Instruments..................991 11.16 Status Register......................994 11.16.1 General Status Register Commands................994 11.16.2 Reading out the EVENt Part..................995 11.16.3 Reading Out the CONDition Part................995 11.16.4 Controlling the ENABle Part..................996 11.16.5 Controlling the Negative Transition Part..............996 11.16.6 Controlling the Positive Transition Part...............
Page 21 ® Contents R&S 11.17.11.1 Reading a File from the Instrument................1023 11.17.11.2 Creating a File on the Instrument................1024 11.17.12 Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement..............1024 11.17.12.1 Using Predefined Standard Wibro................1025 11.17.12.2 Defining 5 Ranges with all Parameters..............1025 11.17.13 Spurious Emissions Measurement................1028 11.17.14 Averaging I/Q Data....................1031 11.17.15 Using IQ Gating......................1032...
Page 22 ® Contents R&S 14.1.7 Automatic Login Function..................1078 14.1.8 Mapping Network Drives................... 1079 14.1.9 Sharing Directories (only with Microsoft Networks)...........1080 14.2 Operation with Windows Remote Desktop ............1081 14.2.1 Configuring the R&S ESR for Remote Operation............. 1081 14.2.2 Configuring the Controller..................1082 14.3 Operation with a VNC Client..................
Page 23 ® Contents R&S User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 24: Preface
® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 Preface This chapter provides safety-related information, an overview of the user documenta- tion and the conventions used in the documentation. 1.1 For Your Safety The R&S ESR is designated for use in industrial, administrative, and laboratory envi- ronments.
Page 25: Conventions For Procedure Descriptions
® Preface R&S How to Use the Help System Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font. "References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota- tion marks. 1.2.2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When operating the instrument, several alternative methods may be available to per- form the same task.
Page 26 ® Preface R&S How to Use the Help System If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time, the submenu of the softkey is displayed. Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs: ●...
Page 27 ® Preface R&S How to Use the Help System Closing the help window ► Press the [ESC] key or a function key on the front panel. User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 28: Documentation Overview
® Documentation Overview R&S Service Manual 2 Documentation Overview This section provides an overview of the R&S ESR user documentation. Unless speci- fied otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S ESR product page at: www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/esr 2.1 Getting Started Manual Introduces the R&S ESR and describes how to set up and start working with the prod- uct.
Page 29: Instrument Security Procedures
® Documentation Overview R&S Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, etc. https://gloris.rohde-schwarz.com). 2.4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ESR in secure areas. It is avail- able for download on the Internet. 2.5 Basic Safety Instructions Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.
Page 30: Quick Start
® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View 3 Quick Start Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S ESR Quick Start Guide. ● Front and Rear Panel View..................27 ● Preparing for Use....................39 ●...
Page 31: Function Keys On The Front Panel
® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View Description Touchscreen; display area for measure- Chapter 3.1.1.2, "Touchscreen Display", on page 31 ment results Auxiliary functions to display Windows Chapter 3.1.1.1, "Function Keys on the Front Panel", Start menu or on-screen keyboard on page 28 Display options for screen Chapter 3.4.4, "Changing the...
Page 32 ® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View Table 3-1: Function keys Turns the instrument on and off. Restores the default configuration of the R&S ESR. Provides functionality to save, restore and manage instrument settings and other files. Provides functionality for general instrument configuration, for example: ●...
Page 33 ® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View Allows you to define and use softkeys to load custom configurations. Opens the root menu of the current application. FREQ (CHANNEL) Provides functionality to define frequency parameters, for example: ● the center or receiver frequency ●...
Page 34: Touchscreen Display
® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View MKR➙ Provides functionality to position and control markers, for example: ● to position the marker on the center frequency ● to define the marker search area ● to configure the peak excursion MEAS Provides the measurement functions, for example: ●...
Page 35 ® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View Risk of touchscreen damage Inappropriate tools or excessive force can damage the touchscreen. Observe the following instructions when operating the touchscreen: ● Never touch the screen with ball point pens or other sharp objects, use your fingers instead.
Page 36: Connectors On The Front Panel
® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View 5 = Measurement results area 6 = Diagram footer with diagram-specific information, depending on measurement mode 7 = Error indicator 8 = Error message, if available 9 = Device status 10 = Progress bar for measurement 11 = Date and time display 12 = Softkeys for menu access 3.1.1.3...
Page 37: Optional Front Panel Connectors
® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View With option R&S ESR-B29, the minimum frequency is extended to 10 Hz at both RF inputs. Risk of instrument damage Do not overload the input. For maximum allowed values, see the data sheet. For AC-coupling, a DC input voltage of 50 V must never be exceeded.
Page 38: Rear Panel View
® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View The output of the tracking generator is connected to the DUT via a cable equipped with a male N connector. The female connector is available only with the tracking generator option (R&S FSV-B9). Risk of damaging the tracking generator To avoid damaging the tracking generator, make sure that the reverse power (i.e.
Page 39: Standard Rear Panel Connectors
® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View 9 = REF OUT 10 = GPIB interface 11 = AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch with fuse 3.1.2.1 Standard Rear Panel Connectors EMI impact on measurement results Electromagnetic interference (EMI) may affect the measurement results. To suppress generated electromagnetic interference (EMI): ●...
Page 40 ® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View EXT TRIGGER / GATE IN The female connector for external trigger/gate input is used to control the measure- ment by means of an external signal. The voltage levels can range from 0.5 to 3.5 V. The default value is 1.4 V.
Page 41: Optional Rear Panel Connectors
® Quick Start R&S Front and Rear Panel View AUX PORT The 9 pole SUB-D male connector provides control signals for controlling external devi- ces. The voltage levels are of the TTL type (5 V). Signal Description +5 V / max. 250 mA Supply voltage for external circuits Control Phase N Controls the 150 kHz highpass filter...
Page 42: Preparing For Use
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 3.2 Preparing for Use 3.2.1 Putting into Operation This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R&S ESR for the first time. Risk of injury due to disregarding safety information Observe the information on appropriate operating conditions provided in the data sheet to prevent personal injury or damage to the instrument.
Page 43: Unpacking And Checking The Instrument
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use Instrument damage caused by electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the electronic components of the instrument and the device under test (DUT). Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the instrument's test ports. To pre- vent electrostatic discharge, use a wrist strap and cord and connect yourself to the ground, or use a conductive floor mat and heel strap combination.
Page 44: Placing Or Mounting The Instrument
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use ● Power cable ● Quick Start Guide 3.2.1.3 Placing or Mounting the Instrument The R&S ESR is designed for use under laboratory conditions, either on a bench top or in a rack. Bench Top Operation If the R&S ESR is operated on a bench top, the surface should be flat.
Page 45: Connecting The Ac Power
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use Risk of injury when stacking instruments A stack of instruments can tilt over and cause injury if not stacked correctly. Further- more, the instruments at the bottom of the stack can be damaged due to the load imposed by the instruments on top.
Page 46: Changing The Ac Supply Fuse
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use datasheet for the requirements of voltage and frequency. The AC power connector is located on the rear panel of the instrument. ► Connect the R&S ESR to the AC power supply using the supplied power cable. Since the instrument is assembled in line with the specifications for safety class EN61010, it may only be connected to an outlet that has a ground contact.
Page 47: Switching The Instrument On And Off
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use Switching the DC power supply on 1. Connect the R&S ESR DC power supply device to the DC power source (e.g. bat- tery pack or vehicle) as described in the option's installation guide. 2.
Page 48: Maintenance
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use Risk of losing data If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings. Furthermore, program data can be lost. Press the ON/STANDBY key first to shut down the application properly.
Page 49: Checking The Supplied Options
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use To display the alignment results again later ● Press the [SETUP] key. ● Press the "Alignment" softkey. ● Press the "Show Align Results" softkey. Performing a self test The self test does not need to be repeated every time the instrument is switched on. It is only necessary when instrument malfunction is suspected.
Page 50 ® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use ● Power sensors, e.g. of the NRP Zxy family Installing USB devices is easy under Windows, because all USB devices are plug&play. After a device is connected to the USB interface, the operating system auto- matically searches for a suitable device driver.
Page 51: Connecting An External Monitor
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 3.2.3 Connecting an External Monitor You can connect an external monitor to the "MONITOR" connector on the instrument's rear panel. For details on the connector refer to "MONITOR (VGA)" on page 36. 1. Connect the external monitor to the R&S ESR. 2.
Page 52: Setting The Date And Time
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use Remote commands: ROSC:SOUR EXT ROSC:EXT:FREQ 20 3.2.4.2 Setting the Date and Time You can set the date and time for the internal real time clock as follows: Opening the Date and Time Properties dialog box 1.
Page 53: Aligning The Touchscreen
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 4. Optionally, select the "Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes" check box. 5. Click "OK". 3.2.4.3 Aligning the Touchscreen When the device is delivered, the touchscreen is initially aligned. However, it may become necessary to adjust the alignment later, e.g.
Page 54 ® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use Using the Default Color Settings To select the default setting for brightness, tint and color saturation of all screen objects: 1. In the "Screen Colors" submenu (see "Displaying the Screen Colors Submenu" on page 50), press the "Set to Default" softkey. The "Set User Colors to Default"...
Page 55 ® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 4. Press the arrow on the "Selected Object" list and select the object for which you want to change the color setting. 5. Select the color you want to use for the object. The defined color is displayed in the "Preview"...
Page 56: Setting The Display Power Save Function
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 4. Press the arrow on the "Selected Object" list and select the object for which you want to change the color setting. 5. In the color palette, select the color you want to use for the object, or enter values for tint, saturation and brightness.
Page 57: Selecting And Configuring Printers
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 3.2.4.6 Selecting and Configuring Printers You can printout your measurement results using a local printer or a network printer. The instrument supports two independent printout settings. This allows you to quickly switch between output to a file and a printer. Configuring the Printer and the Printout 1.
Page 58 ® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 6. To redirect the output to a postscript file rather than a printer, select the "Print to file" option. 7. In the "Orientation" field, select the desired orientation. 8. Optionally, activate the "Print Date and Time" option to add this information to the printout.
Page 59: Windows Operating System
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 3.2.5 Windows Operating System The instrument contains the Microsoft Windows operating system which has been con- figured according to the instrument's features and needs. Changes in the system setup are only required when peripherals like keyboard or a printer are installed or if the net- work configuration does not comply with the default settings.
Page 60: Login
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use For details and recommendations, see the Rohde & Schwarz White Paper 1EF96: Mal- ware Protection Windows 3.2.5.3 Login Microsoft Windows requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and password in a login window. By default, the R&S ESR provides two user accounts: ●...
Page 61: Preparing For Use
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use The "Login" dialog box is displayed, in which you can enter the different user account name and password. Deactivating the automatic login function To deactivate the automatic login function, perform the following steps: 1.
Page 62: Accessing The Start Menu
® Quick Start R&S Preparing for Use 3.2.5.4 Accessing the Start Menu The Windows "Start" menu provides access to the Microsoft Windows functionality and installed programs. To open the "Start" menu: ► In Windows 10: Press the "Windows" key or the [CTRL + ESC] key combination on your (external) keyboard.
Page 63: Firmware Update And Installation Of Firmware Options
® Quick Start R&S Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options 3. Press the "GPIB" softkey. The submenu for setting the parameters of the remote control interface is dis- played. Setting the GPIB address ► In the "GPIB" menu, press the "GPIB Address" softkey. The edit dialog box for the GPIB address is displayed.
Page 64 ® Quick Start R&S Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options 3. Press the "Firmware Update" softkey. The "Firmware Update" dialog box is displayed. 4. Enter the drive name and directory via the keypad. Example: The installation files are stored on a memory stick in the Update direc- tory.
Page 65: Activating Firmware Options
® Quick Start R&S Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options 3.3.2 Activating Firmware Options Firmware options are enabled by entering license keys as described here. To activate firmware options 1. Press the [SETUP] key. 2. Press the "More" softkey. 3.
Page 66: Basic Operations
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations 3.4 Basic Operations This chapter gives an overview on how to work with the R&S ESR. It describes what kind of information is displayed in the diagram area, how to operate the R&S ESR via the front panel keys and other interaction methods, and how to use the Online Help.
Page 67: Channel Display
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations 9 = Measurement progress bar 10 = Date and time 11 = Softkeys 3.4.1.1 Channel Display Using the R&S ESR you can handle several different measurement tasks (channels) at the same time (although they can only be performed asynchronously). For each chan- nel, a separate tab is displayed on the screen.
Page 68: Measurement Settings Information
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations Demod Active AF demodulation. Input Number of the RF Input and the type of coupling currently used. Resolution bandwidth currently used. Current (RF) attenuation level. Measurement time currently used. Preamp Current preamplification level. Current scan count. Step Current frequency step mode.
Page 69: Diagram-Specific And Trace Information
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations In Receiver mode, the R&S ESR shows the following information. Trigger source (for details see trigger settings in the "TRIG" menu in the Operating manual) ● EXT: External ● VID: Video 75 Ω The input impedance of the instrument is set to 75 Ω. In Spectrum mode, the following types of information may be displayed, if applicable.
Page 70 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations The header may contain a user-defined introductory title, see Chapter 3.4.4.7, "Adding a Title to the Diagram Header", on page 89. Editing settings in the diagram header All settings that are displayed in the diagram header can easily be edited by selecting the setting in the display (by tapping or clicking).
Page 71 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations square brackets after the index indicates the trace to which the marker is assigned. (Example: M1[1] defines marker 1 on trace 1.) For more than 2 markers, a separate marker table is displayed beneath the diagram. The marker function information is not available in realtime mode.
Page 72: Instrument And Status Information
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations The diagram footer can be removed from the display temporarily, see Chapter 3.4.4.8, "Removing the Diagram Footer", on page 89. 3.4.1.5 Instrument and Status Information Global instrument settings, the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram.
Page 73: Means Of User Interaction
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations NO REF Instrument was set to an external reference but no signal was detected on the refer- ence input. OVEN OCXO reference frequency (option R&S FSV-B4) has not yet reached its operating temperature. The message usually disappears a few minutes after power has beeen switched on.
Page 74 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations Displaying the toolbar ► Press the "Toolbar" icon to the right of the tabs in the display to toggle the toolbar on or off. Alternatively: 1. Press the [SETUP] key. 2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey. 3.
Page 75: Touchscreen
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations 3.4.2.2 Touchscreen A touchscreen is a screen that is touch-sensitive, i.e. it reacts in a specified way when a particular element on the screen is tapped by a finger or a pointing device, for exam- ple.
Page 76: Keypad
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations When you press this key, the display switches between the following options: ● Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen ● Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen ● No keyboard displayed You can use the TAB key on the on-screen keyboard to move the focus from one field to another in dialog boxes.
Page 77: Rotary Knob
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations – If no input field is currently active, the most recently entered value is undone, i.e. the previous value is retrieved. Thus, you can toggle between two values (e.g. spans). ● ENTER key – Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries.
Page 78: Softkeys
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations LEFTARROW/RIGHTARROW keys The [LEFTARROW] or [RIGHTARROW] keys do the following: ● In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor. ● In a list, scroll forward and backward through the list entries. ● In a table, move the selection bar horizontally. ●...
Page 79: Context-Sensitive Menus
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations ● If the softkey label contains a ">" symbol, it represents a submenu of further soft- keys. When you press it, the submenu is displayed. ● The "Up" key switches to the next higher level of the menu. ●...
Page 80: Dialog Boxes
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations If a menu entry contains an arrow to the right of it, a submenu is available for that entry. ► To close the menu, press the ESC key or click in the display outside of the menu. 3.4.2.9 Dialog Boxes In most cases, the R&S ESR dialog boxes are designed to enter a numeric value.
Page 81: Setting Parameters
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations The title bar shows the name of the parameter that was selected. The entry is per- formed in the editing line. When the dialog box is displayed, the focus is on the editing line and it contains the currently used parameter value and its unit. The optional third line shows status and error messages which always refer to the current entry.
Page 82 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations sign key (-) toggles between capital and small letters. For the assignment refer to Table 3-3. Entering numbers and (special) characters via the keypad 1. Press the key once to enter the first possible value. 2.
Page 83: Navigating In Dialog Boxes
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations Key name Series of (special) characters and number provided (upper inscription) G H I 4 J K L 5 M N O 6 Ň Ö P Q R S 1 T U V 2 Ü W X Y Z 3 <blank>...
Page 84 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations you must first switch to the edit mode in order to make changes. A focused area in the edit mode is marked with a dashed blue frame (see Figure 3-7). Figure 3-6: Focused area Figure 3-7: Focused area in edit mode Edit mode When using the touchscreen for focus changes, all focused areas are in the edit mode...
Page 85 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations ● To select or deselect an option, press the option on the screen. Alternatively: – If the focused area consists of more than one option and the edit mode is not active, change into the edit mode. –...
Page 86: Changing The Display
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations 3.4.4 Changing the Display 3.4.4.1 Changing the Focus Any selected function is always performed on the currently focussed element in the display, e.g. a dialog field, diagram, or table row. Which element is focussed is indica- ted by a blue frame (diagram, window, table) or is otherwise highlighted (softkey, marker etc.).
Page 87 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations the R&S ESR interface is fully operable from a monitor with a resolution of 1024x768 pixels. Switching to soft Front Panel display 1. Press the SETUP key. 2. Press the "General Setup" softkey. 3. Press the "More" softkey. 4.
Page 88 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations Working with the Soft Front Panel Basic operation with the soft Front Panel is identical to normal operation. To activate a key, either press the key on the touchscreen, or click on it with the mouse pointer. To simulate the use of the rotary knob, use the additional keys displayed between the key- pad and the arrow keys: Icon...
Page 89: Enlarging The Display Area
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations Auto close option By default, the "Auto close" option is activated and the Mini Front Panel window closes automatically after you select a key. This is useful if you only require the Front Panel display to press a single function key.
Page 90: Zooming Into The Diagram
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations To display the toolbar: 1. Press the DISPLAY key. 2. Under "Select Tool Bar State", select "On". Alternatively: 1. Press the SETUP key. 2. Press the "Display Setup" softkey. 3. Press the "Tool Bar State On/Off" softkey. The toolbar is displayed at the top of the screen.
Page 91 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations 3. Drag the lower right corner of the rectangle (either via touchscreen or a mouse pointer) to define the area in the diagram to be enlarged. 4. Repeat these steps, if necessary, to enlarge the diagram further. Scrolling in the zoomed display You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at the right and at the bottom of the diagram.
Page 92: Adding A Title To The Diagram Header
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations To return to selection mode in the diagram While you are in zoom mode, touching the screen changes the zoom area. In order to select or move a trace or marker, you must switch back to selection mode: ►...
Page 93: Selecting A Theme
® Quick Start R&S Basic Operations The footer is displayed beneath the diagram or removed from display. 3.4.4.9 Selecting a Theme You can select a theme for the screen display. The theme defines the colors used for keys and screen elements, for example. The default theme is "BlueOcean". Selecting a theme 1.
Page 94: Changing The Display Update Rate
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples 3.4.4.11 Changing the Display Update Rate When performance is poor due to slow data transfer (for example during remote con- trol), it may be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen display is upda- ted.
Page 95: Measuring The Level And Frequency Using Markers
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples High input values If levels higher than +30 dBm (=1 W) are expected or are possible, a power attenuator must be inserted before the RF input of the analyzer. If this is not done, signal levels exceeding 30 dBm can damage the RF attenuator or the input mixer.
Page 96 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples The level and frequency values measured by the marker are displayed in the marker field at the top edge of the screen. They can be taken as the measurement result. M1[1] -30.00 dBm 128.00000 MHz The field header indicates the number of the marker (Marker 1) and the trace on which the marker is located ([1] = Trace 1).
Page 97: Measuring The Signal Frequency Using The Frequency Counter
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples In the presettings, the value of the reference level is -10 dBm. If the input signal is -30 dBm, the reference level can be reduced by 20 dB without causing the signal path to be overloaded.
Page 98 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples b) Press the [SPAN] key and enter 1 MHz. The frequency span of the R&S ESR is set to 1 MHz. 4. In the "Setup" menu, select "Reference Ext". 5. Activate the marker by pressing the [MKR] key. The marker is activated and set to the signal maximum.
Page 99: Measuring Harmonics Of Sinusoidal Signals
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Prerequisites for using the internal frequency counter In order to obtain a correct result when measuring the frequency with the internal fre- quency counter, an RF sinusoidal signal or a spectral line must be available. The marker must be located more than 25 dB above the noise level to ensure that the specified measurement accuracy is adhered to.
Page 100 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples b) In the "MKR" menu, press the "Marker 3" softkey. "Marker 3" is activated as a delta marker ("D3 [1]"). It is automatically set on the next largest harmonic of the signal. The frequency offset and level offset from marker 1 on the fundamental are displayed in the channel information bar (see Figure...
Page 101 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Reducing the noise by reducing the video bandwidth 1. Press the [BW] key. 2. Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey. 3. Reduce the video bandwidth to 1 kHz (for example), by entering 1 kHz. This smoothes the noise significantly, and the sweep time is increased to 200 ms.
Page 102: Measuring Signal Spectra With Multiple Signals
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples 3. For "Trace 1", press the button in the "Trace Mode" column and select "Average" from the list. The noise component of the trace is smoothed by averaging 10 successive traces. 4. Switch off trace averaging by pressing the button in the "Trace Mode" column and selecting "Clear Write"...
Page 103 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Example: Separating Two Signals The two signals have a level of -30 dBm each at a frequency spacing of 30 kHz Table 3-5: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU) Level Frequency Signal generator 1 -30 dBm 128,00 MHz Signal generator 2...
Page 104 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Figure 3-11: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with the resolution band- width which corresponds to the frequency spacing of the signals Matching generator and R&S ESR frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the screen only if the generator frequencies match the frequency display of the R&S ESR exactly.
Page 105 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Figure 3-12: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band- width which is larger than their frequency spacing Note: Reducing the resolution bandwidth. The resolution bandwidth (RBW) can be reduced again by turning the rotary knob counterclockwise, thus yielding a higher frequency resolution.
Page 106: Measuring The Modulation Depth Of An Am-Modulated Carrier (Span > 0)
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Figure 3-13: Measurement of two equally-leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band- width (1 kHz) which is significantly smaller than their frequency spacing 3.5.3.2 Measuring the Modulation Depth of an AM-Modulated Carrier (Span > 0) In the frequency range display, the AM side bands can be resolved with a narrow bandwidth and measured separately.
Page 107: Measuring Am-Modulated Signals
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Table 3-6: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU) Frequency 128 MHz Level -30 dBm Modulation 50 % AM, 10 kHz AF 1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the [PRESET] key. The R&S ESR is set to its default state.
Page 108 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Table 3-7: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU) Frequency 128 MHz Level -30 dBm Modulation 50 % AM, 1 kHz AF 1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the [PRESET] key. The R&S ESR is set to its default state.
Page 109: Measurements In Zero Span
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples 3.5.4 Measurements in Zero Span For radio transmission systems that use the TDMA method (e.g. GSM or IS136), trans- mission quality is determined not only by spectral characteristics but also by character- istics in zero span. A timeslot is assigned to each user since several users share the same frequency.
Page 110 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey and enter 1 ms. The R&S ESR shows the GSM burst continuously across the display. 6. By using the video trigger, set triggering on the rising edge of the burst. a) Press the [TRIG] key.
Page 111 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Figure 3-15: Measurement of the average power during the burst of a GSM signal Measuring the Edges of a GSM Burst with High Time Resolution Because of the high time resolution of the R&S ESR at the 0 Hz display range, the edges of TDMA bursts can be measured precisely.
Page 112 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples a) Press the [MEAS] key. b) Press the "All Functions Off" softkey. 2. Increase the time resolution to 100 µs. a) Press the [SWEEP] key. b) Press the "Sweeptime Manual" softkey and enter 100 µs. 3.
Page 113: Measuring The Signal-To-Noise Ratio Of Burst Signals
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Figure 3-17: Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution 3.5.4.2 Measuring the Signal-to-Noise Ratio of Burst Signals When TDMA transmission methods are used, the signal-to-noise ratio or the deactiva- tion dynamic range can be measured by comparing the power values during the activa- tion phase and the deactivation phase of the transmission burst.
Page 114 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples 1. Set the signal analyzer to the default state by pressing the [PRESET] key. The R&S ESR is set to its default state. 2. Select "Spectrum" mode. 3. Set the center frequency to 890 MHz, the span to 0 Hz and the resolution band- width to 1 MHz.
Page 115 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples g) Using the rotary knob, move the second vertical line to the end of the burst. The R&S ESR displays the power during the activation phase of the burst. Figure 3-18: Power measurement during the activation phase of the burst 8.
Page 116: Measuring Fm-Modulated Signals
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples b) Switch the "Trg/Gate Polarity" softkey to "Neg." The R&S ESR initiates triggering in response to the falling edge of the burst. This shifts the burst to the left-hand half of the measurement diagram. The power is measured in the deactivation phase.
Page 117 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Displaying the AF of an FM-Modulated Carrier Test setup Table 3-11: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMU) Frequency 128 MHz Level -20 dBm Modulation FM 0 kHz deviation (i.e. FM modulation is deactiva- ted), 1 kHz AF 1.
Page 118 ® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples Using the rotary knob, set the reference level such that the filter edge at the center frequency intersects the -10 dB level line. The filter edge of the 300 kHz filter is displayed. This corresponds to the demodulator characteristic for FM signals with a steepness of approx.
Page 119: Storing And Loading Instrument Settings
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples c) Press the "Trg/Gate Level" softkey and enter 50%. A static image for the FM AF signal is produced. Result: (-10 ( 5) dB; this yields a deviation of 100 kHz when the steepness of the demodulator characteristic is 5 dB/100 kHz.
Page 120: Storing An Instrument Configuration (Without Traces)
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples disk or - if selected - on a USB device (e.g. memory stick) or on a network drive. The hard disk has the drive letter C:. In the default state, the current settings are stored. This includes the settings of the measurement functions, the activated limit lines and the active transducer factor.
Page 121: Storing Traces
® Quick Start R&S Basic Measurement Examples 5. Press the "Save File" softkey. The settings file is stored and the dialog box is closed. 3.5.5.2 Storing Traces Before you can store traces, you must first select the corresponding item entry. To do so, proceed as follows: 1.
Page 122: Brief Introduction To Remote Control
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control OFF] key on the front panel; see Chapter 3.2.1.7, "Switching the Instrument On and Off", on page 44. If the instrument is preset, it loads the presettings. You can alter these settings and define a settings file to be loaded. This requires per- forming the following procedure.
Page 123: Linking The Remote Control Library For Visual Basic
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control Using backslashes In programming languages such as C, C++ or programs such as MATLAB or NI Inter- active Control, a backslash starts an escape sequence (e.g. "\n" is used to start a new line).
Page 124 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control ● Creating a response buffer Since the DLL returns zero-terminated strings in responses, a string of sufficient length must be created before the functions InstrRead() and ilrd() are called, because Visual Basic inserts a length specification in front of the strings and this specification is not updated by the DLL.
Page 125: Initialization And Default State
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control 'adjust string length Response = Left(Response, retCount) End Sub The following function illustrates status/error checking. The procedure raises an excep- tion when a VISA error occurs: Public Sub CheckError(ByVal vi As Long, status As Long) Dim ErrorMessage As String * 1024 'Initialize error message string ErrorMessage = ""...
Page 126 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control 'timeout values are in milliseconds 'This example assumes the instrument IP address 10.0.0.10 'If the network provides a name resolution mechanism, the hostname of 'the instrument can be used instead of the numeric IP address 'the resource string for GPIB would be "GPIB::20::INSTR'' status = viOpen(defaultRM, "TCPIP::10.0.0.10::INSTR'', 0, 1000, analyzer) 'status = viOpen(defaultRM, "TCPIP::<hostname>::INSTR'', 0, 1000, analyzer)
Page 127: Sending Simple Instrument Setting Commands
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control control operation, the display itself and the background lighting in particular remain switched on. If you also want to switch off the display itself, you must use the power save function by setting the response time in minutes prior to activation.
Page 128: Marker Positioning And Readout
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control CALL InstrRead(analyzer, CFfrequency$, 20, retCount) 'Read value CR&S FSVan$ = SPACE$(20) 'Provide text variable (20 characters) CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FREQ:SPAN?") 'Request span CALL InstrRead(analyzer, CR&S FSVan$, 20, retCount) 'Read value RLlevel$ = SPACE$(20) 'Provide text variable (20 characters) CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "DISP:TRAC:Y:RLEV?") 'Request ref level setting...
Page 129 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control REM command INIT:CONT OFF has already been sent. The next command REM must not be carried out until a full sweep has been completed. CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "INIT:CONT OFF") REM --------- First method: Using *WAI ------------------------------------ CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "ABOR;INIT:IMM;...
Page 130: Detailed Programming Examples
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control CALL InstrRead(analyzer, ERROR$, 100, retCount) Debug.Print "Error Description : "; ERROR$ END SUB REM ************************************************************************ 3.6.2 Detailed Programming Examples In the following sections, typical programming examples for setting measurement parameters and functions, general settings, printout and data management are provi- ded.
Page 131 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control '--------- Default setting f the R&S FSV --------------------------------- CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status registers CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST") 'Reset instrument CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON") 'ON: screen display on 'OFF: off (improved performance) CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep mode '--------- Frequency setting ----------------------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQUENCY:CENTER 100MHz")
Page 132: Using Markers And Delta Markers
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control 'Detector Trace2 CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET3:AUTO ON") 'Detector Trace3 CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET4:AUTO ON") 'Detector Trace4 CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET5:AUTO ON") 'Detector Trace5 CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DET6:AUTO ON") 'Detector Trace6 '--------- Bandwidths and sweep time --------------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"BAND:RES 100KHz") 'Resolution bandwidth (*) CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"BAND:VID 1MHz") 'Video bandwidth...
Page 133 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control 'Set marker 1 to trace 1 CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:MAX;X?;Y?") 'Marker to peak; read frequency and level CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount) Debug.Print "Marker 1: ";result$ CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT2:STAT ON;MAX;MAX:LEFT") 'Activate delta marker 2, 'set to peak and then to next peak left CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT2:X?;Y?")
Page 134 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control END SUB REM *********************************************************************** Frequency Counting The following example is based on a signal at 100 MHz with a level of -30 dBm. Again, the instrument's default setting can be used (SetupInstrument). The purpose of fre- quency counting is to determine the exact frequency of the signal at 100 MHz.
Page 135 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control REM ************************************************************************* Public Sub RefFixed() Dim retCount as Long CALL SetupInstrument 'Default setting '--------- Measuring the reference point ---------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Switch to single sweep CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:PEXC 6DB") 'Define peak excursion CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:STAT ON") 'Activate marker 1 CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:TRAC 1")
Page 136 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control REM ************************************************************************ Public Sub Noise() Dim retCount as Long '--------- Default setting of the R&S FSV -------------------------------- CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST") 'Reset instrument CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep mode '--------- Setting the frequency ------------------------------------------ CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQUENCY:CENTER 100MHz") 'Center frequency...
Page 137: Reading Out Trace Data
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control 3.6.2.3 Reading Out Trace Data In the following example, the trace data obtained with the default setting is read from the instrument and displayed in a list on the screen. Readout occurs first in binary for- mat and then in ASCII format, once with the span >...
Page 138: Storing And Loading Instrument Settings
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync '--------- Defining the frequency range for output ------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:STARt?") 'Read start frequency CALL InstrRead(analyzer,startFreq$, 100, retCount) startFreq = Val(startFreq$) CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:SPAN?") 'Read span CALL InstrRead(analyzer,span$, 100, retCount) span = Val(span$) '--------- Reading out in binary format ------------------------------------ CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FORMAT REAL,32")
Page 139 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control Storing Instrument Settings In the following example, the settings/measured data to be stored are defined initially, in which case only the hardware settings are stored. However, the selection commands for the other settings are specified with the state "OFF" for the sake of completeness. REM *********************************************************************** Public Sub StoreSettings() 'This subroutine selects the settings to be stored and creates the...
Page 140: Configuring And Starting A Printout
® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control Setting the Data Record for Startup Recall In the following example, the first step is to change the R&S ESR to the default state. In the next step, the TEST1 data record stored under C:\R_S\Instr\user is selected for the startup recall function, i.e.
Page 141 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control NEXT i '--------- Default setting of the R&S FSV ------------------------------- CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*RST") 'Reset instrument CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT:CONT OFF") 'Single sweep mode CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SYST:DISP:UPD ON") 'Screen display on '--------- Measurement settings ------------------------------------------ CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:CENT 100MHz;SPAN 10MHz") 'Frequency setting...
Page 142 ® Quick Start R&S Brief Introduction to Remote Control CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP;*OPC") 'Start printout SRQWaitTimeout = 5000 'Allow 5s for completion 'Now wait for the service request statusSRQ = viWaitOnEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, SRQWaitTimeout, _ eventType, eventVi) CALL viClose(eventVi) 'Close the context before continuing CALL viDisableEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE) 'Disable subsequent events IF NOT(statusSRQ...
Page 143: Measurement Modes
® Measurement Modes R&S Spectrum Mode 4 Measurement Modes The R&S ESR provides several measurement modes for different analysis tasks. When you activate a measurement mode, a new measurement channel is created. The channel determines the settings for that measurement mode. Each channel is dis- played in a separate tab on the screen.
Page 144: I/Q Analyzer Mode
® Measurement Modes R&S Measurement Mode Root Menus (HOME Key) SCPI command: INST SAN 4.3 I/Q Analyzer Mode The I/Q Analyzer mode provides measurement and display functions for digital I/Q sig- nals. For more information on functionality available for the I/Q Analyzer see Chapter 7, "I/Q Analyzer", on page 458.
Page 145: Receiver Mode
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays 5 Receiver Mode In receiver mode, the R&S ESR measures the level at the set frequency with a selected bandwidth and measurement time. Signal weighting is by means of detectors. A frequency scan can be performed after setting the start and stop frequency and the step width.
Page 146: If Spectrum Analysis
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Up to four bargraphs with different detector weighting can be displayed simultaneously. The R&S ESR assigns a different color to each detector. This provides an easy way to compare the signal level with different weighting factors. 1 = current level unit 2 = current receiver frequency 3 = detectors...
Page 147: Scans
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays carrier or pulse-like interference which is represented in the form of narrow horizontal lines on the screen. The accuracy of the frequency axis corresponds to the reference used (internal or external). The frequency display range (span) can be selected between 1 kHz and 10 MHz in steps of 1, 2 and 5.
Page 148: Stepped Scans In The Frequency Domain
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays The scan can be performed as a single scan or continuously. In the case of single scan it is stopped when the stop frequency is reached. The continuous scan can be interrup- ted or terminated any time.
Page 149: Time Domain Scans In The Frequency Domain
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Nevertheless, this time is still very long, often in the order of hours, especially for the CISPR radiated emissions tests. A way out of this situation can be time-domain mea- surements, see Chapter 5.1.3.2, "Time Domain Scans in the Frequency Domain", on page 146.
Page 150 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Example: The graph below shows a scan performed in four subranges. The scan start at the start frequency of subrange 1. Between subrange 2 and 3 is a frequency gap, where no measurement is performed.
Page 151: Scan On A Fixed Frequency
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Auto Rang- = Turns automatic selection of the input attenuation on and off, see Auto Range (On Off) RF Attenua- = Attenuation level at the RF input. tion Preamplifier = Turns the preamplifier on and off. If you select "Auto", the preamplifier is also considered in the auto ranging process.
Page 152 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays sured against a limit line, and the level values above the set margin are written into the peak list. The resulting peak list then is used for the final measurement where only the frequencies in the peak list are measured with the required detector.
Page 153: Final Measurement
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays If the prescan is performed in parallel with several detectors, typically Peak and Aver- age, the maxima are determined separately for the two detectors so that the distribu- tion of narrowband and wideband sources of interference can be taken into account. For example, the frequency of the maximum determined with the average detector can be used for the final measurement performed with the CISPR Avg detector and the fre- quency found in the prescan carried out with the peak detector is taken for the final...
Page 154: Spectrogram
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays be switched to interactive. Measurement settings can not be changed. The advantage is that the measurement runs on its own. Control of the final measurement is possible in interactive final measurement mode. In interactive final measurement mode, the R&S ESR stops on each frequency of the peak list.
Page 155: Color Map
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Result coloring To get the final looks of the spectrogram, the R&S ESR applies colors to visualize the power levels in a two dimensional diagram. Each color in the spectrogram corresponds to a particular power level that is shown in the color map in the title bar of the result display.
Page 156 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays You can access the Color Mapping dialog via the "Color Mapping" softkey or by tap- ping on the color map. For the spectrogram the R&S ESR maps power levels (dBm). Selecting the color scheme Before adjusting the details of the color map, you should select the color scheme you are most comfortable with.
Page 157 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays shape of the measurement results. To do so and still cover the whole signal, move the sliders in a way that the first and last bar of the histogram are still inside the range. You can optimize the display further, if you suppress the noise by excluding the lower 10 to 20 dB of the distribution.
Page 158 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Adjusting the reference level and level range Changing the reference level and level range also affects the color scheme in the spectrogram. Make sure, however, that you never adjust in a way that could overload the R&S ESR. Defining the shape of the color curve Now that the color scheme and range of the color map suit your needs, you can improve the color map even more by changing the shape of the color curve.
Page 159: Measurement Control
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Alternatively, you can enter the shape of the color curve in the corresponding input field below the color curve pane. A value of 0 corresponds to a linear shape, negative val- ues up to -1 shift the curve to the left, positive values up to 1 shift the curve to the right. 5.1.7 Measurement Control Measurements in receiver mode allow you to control the course of the measurement.
Page 160: Bargraph Control
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays The submenu contains more result displays. Note that the Spectrogram is available for the Scan display and the IF Analysis. To add the Spectrogram, either Scan or IF Analysis have to be turned on already. If you are using the Scan and IF Analysis simultaneously, the Spectrogram is unavailable.
Page 161: Scan Control
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Continuous Bargraph / Single Bargraph Selects single or continuous bargraph measurements. Continuous bargraph measurements continuously evaluate the signal level at the receiver frequency. A single bargraph measurement evaluates the signal level at the receiver frequency once and then stops.
Page 162 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Hold Scan........................159 Continue at Rec Frequency..................159 Continue at Hold......................159 Continue at Frame...................... 159 Stop Scan........................159 Hold Scan Interrupts the scan and opens a submenu that contains functionality to control the scan.
Page 163: Final Measurement Control
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Remote command: on page 640 ABORt 5.1.7.5 Final Measurement Control The final measurement is started in the "Test Automation" menu . The R&S ESR pro- vides two methods to perform a final measurement: an automatic and interactive final measurement.
Page 164 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Writes the maximum level that has been measured on this frequency during the prescan to the final peak list without performing a final measurement. ● Stop the final measurement ("Stop Final Meas") 4.
Page 165: Measurement Settings
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Skip Frequency Skips the peak list entry the final measurement is due to measure next and proceeds with the next peak. Available for interactive final measurements. Remote command: Get Maxhold Uses the highest level that was measured during the scan for the final results instead of the signal level measured during the final measurement.
Page 166 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays The tuning frequency has to be set to at least twice the IF bandwidth. When the tuning frequency is lower than twice the IF bandwidth, the IF bandwidth is automatically reduced so that this condition is met again. Remote command: on page 665 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer...
Page 167: Spectrogram Configuration
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Squelch ← Demod Defines the minimum level for the signal to be demodulated. For more information see Chapter 5.2.4, "AF Demodulation", on page 172. Remote command: Turning on the squelch: on page 649 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] Defining a squelch level: on page 648...
Page 168 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurements and Result Displays Color Mapping Opens a dialog box to define the color map of the spectrogram. For more information see Chapter 5.1.6.2, "Color Map", on page 152. 1 = Color map: shows the current color distribution 2 = Preview pane: shows a preview of the spectrogram with any changes that you make to the color scheme 3 = Color curve pane: graphic representation of all settings available to customize the color scheme...
Page 169: Measurement Basics
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics 5.2 Measurement Basics Measurement basics explain various terms and principles used in the context of EMI measurements. They also assist you in finding the right configuration for your mea- surement tasks. ● Measurement Bandwidth..................166 ●...
Page 170: Detectors
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics The higher spectral resolution with smaller bandwidths leads to longer measurement times at each frequency, because the measurement time has to allow the resolution fil- ters to settle during a sweep at all signal levels and frequencies to be displayed. For large measurement bandwidths, signal parts that are very far away (e.g.
Page 171 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics Average detector The average detector yields the average level of the samples of the samples measured during the set measurement time. With average detection selected, the video voltage (envelope of IF signal) is averaged during the measurement time.
Page 172 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics Sample detector The sample detector displays the instantaneous value of the level at a pixel. It routes through the sampled data without any further evaluation. The sample detector is used for IF analysis and for noise or phase noise marker calcu- lation in analyzer mode.
Page 173 ® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics Band A Band B Band C/D Band E Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz > 1 GHz Resolution band- 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz width Time constant of...
Page 174: Trace Modes
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics Table 5-1: RMS Average detector Band A Band B Band C/D Band E Frequency range < 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz > 1 GHz Resolution band- 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz...
Page 175: Af Demodulation
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed. The R&S ESR saves the smallest of the previously stored/currently measured values in the trace memory. This mode is useful e.g. for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi- ble.
Page 176: V-Networks Control (Lisn)
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics The R&S ESR demodulates the signal on the receiver frequency in a bandwidth corre- sponding to the resolution bandwidth to the audio output. A squelch function that is linked to the video trigger defines the level that the signal must at least have to be demodulated.
Page 177: Transducers
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics R&S Receiver Adapter Pin ESH3-Z5 Filter (9-pol  25-pol) PE fl PE flo DGND DGND +5 V +5 V Figure 5-6: Connection from R&S ESR to R&S ESH3-Z5 Adapter Pin R&S Receiver ENV216 Filter (9-pol ...
Page 178: Preamplifier
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics If a transducer is switched on it is considered as part of the unit during the measure- ment, i.e. the measured values are displayed in the correct unit and magnitude. When working with two measurement windows, the transducer is always assigned to two win- dows.
Page 179: Exported Peak List
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics overload by strong out-of-band signals is reduced to a minimum. For frequencies between 100 Hz to 7 GHz, the signal level of the subsequent mixer is 20 dB higher so that the maximum input level is reduced by the gain of the preamplifier. For frequencies above 7 GHz, the gain is 30 dB.
Page 180: Formats For Returned Values: Ascii Format And Binary Format
® Receiver Mode R&S Measurement Basics RF Att;10.000000;dB RF attenuation level in scan range <x> Auto Preamp;OFF; Auto preamplification state for scan range <x> Preamp;0.000000;dB Preamplification state for scan range <x> TRACE <x> FINAL Peak list contents for trace <x> after scan [or final measurement] Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE;...
Page 181: Common Measurement Settings
® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Header prefix, 1 byte <NoOfDigits> Number of digits of the following number of data bytes (= 4 in the example), 1 byte <NoOfDataBytes> Number of following data bytes in decimal form (= 1024 in the example), 1...9 bytes <Value>...
Page 182: Defining The Frequency And Span
® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings 5.3.1 Defining the Frequency and Span The frequency and span settings define the scope of the signal to be analyzed. The settings are available in the [FREQ] and [SPAN] menus. Span settings and signal tracking are only available for IF Analysis (firmware applica- tion R&S ESR-K56).
Page 183 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Remote command: on page 665 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP Start / Stop Frequency Defines the start and stop frequency for the scan. The range for the start frequency is f to (f - 10 Hz). The range for the stop frequency is (f + 10 Hz) to f and f are defined in the datasheet.
Page 184 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings For a description of the softkeys of the submenu, see "Signal Track (span > 0)" on page 347. 5.3.2 Configuring the Level Display and the RF Input The settings to define the level display range for the scan and to configure the RF input are available in the [AMPT] menu.
Page 185 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings An attenuation of 0 dB cannot be set manually either. This avoids 0 dB being switched on inadvertently, particularly when DUTs with high RFI voltage are measured. Remote command: on page 669 INPut:ATTenuation:PROTection[:STATe] Auto Range (On Off) Turns automatic configuration of the attenuation level on and off.
Page 186 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Unit Relative unit dBµV dBµV/MHz dBµV/m dBµV/mMHz (Available for active transducers only.) dBmV dBmV/MHz dBµA dBµA/MHz dBµA/m dBµA/mMHz (Available for active transducers only.) dBpW dBpW/MHz dBpT dBpT/MHz The conversion to 1 MHz bandwidth is realized via the pulse bandwidth of the selected resolution bandwidth.
Page 187 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Input 50 Ω/75 Ω Uses 50 Ω or 75 Ω as reference impedance for the measured levels. Default setting is 50 Ω. The setting 75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Ω...
Page 188 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings ● CISPR only Gaussian filter with a 6 bandwidth. 6 dB bandwidths that comply with CISPR stand- ards are available. ● MIL Std only Gaussian filter with a 6 bandwidth. 6 dB bandwidths that comply with military standards are available.
Page 189 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Remote command: on page 665 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing 5.3.5 Configuring the Trigger The trigger settings are available in the [TRIG] menu. External........................186 Free Run........................186 Video........................... 186 Trigger Polarity......................186 External Selects an external trigger source. The external trigger source is a TTL signal fed in at the EXT TRIG/GATE IN interface on the rear panel.
Page 190 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings 5.3.6 Controlling Inputs and Outputs The input/output settings are available in the [Input/Output ] menu. For information on the LISN control see Chapter 5.3.7.6, "LISN Settings", on page 196. Input (AC/DC)......................187 Input (1 2)........................187 User Port........................
Page 191 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings 5.3.7 Test Automation The test automation settings are availbale in the [MEAS] and [MEAS Config] menu. The Test Automation dialog box contains functionality to configure automated test sequences. It is made up of several tabs, each of which contains the settings for one of the stages in an automated test sequence (see alsoChapter 5.1, "Measurements and Result Dis- plays",...
Page 192 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings ● item includes (blue state) or excludes (grey state) the peak search and later stages from the test sequence. ● item opens the Peak Search tab. ● item includes (blue state) or excludes (grey state) the final measurement from the test sequence.
Page 193 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Start / Stop Frequency....................190 Step Mode........................190 Time Domain Scan (On Off)..................191 Adjust Axis........................191 Insert Range Before / After..................191 Delete Range......................191 Range 1 to 10......................191 Prev / Next Range.......................192 Start / Stop Frequency Defines the start and stop frequency for the scan.
Page 194 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings "LIN" Linear frequency steps. The stepsize is fix and depends on the Stepsize. "LOG" Logarithmic frequency steps. The stepsize is a percentage of the current frequency. Remote command: on page 678 [[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing Time Domain Scan (On Off) Turns the time domain scan on and off.
Page 195 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings ● Receiver Input For more information see Chapter 5.1.3.3, "The Scan Table", on page 146. Remote command: Chapter 11.4.6.2, "Scan Table", on page 674 RF input: on page 672 INPut:TYPE Prev / Next Range Selects the scan range to the left or right of the currently selected scan range.
Page 196 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Remote command: on page 680 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod No Of Peaks Defines the number of peaks the R&S ESR looks for during a peak search. The range is from 1 to 500 peaks. The number of peaks only takes effect if the peak search mode is "Peaks". Remote command: on page 680 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges...
Page 197 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings 5.3.7.4 Peak Lists The peak list dialog box is available for the prescan results and the final measurement results. Both dialog boxes contain the same elements. Peak List........................194 Insert Frequency......................194 Delete Frequency......................194 Sort by Delta Limit.......................195...
Page 198 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Remote command: not supported Sort by Delta Limit Sort the entries of the peak list according to the delta limit results. The delta limit is the distance of a peak to a limit line, if one has been assigned. Remote command: not supported Symbols (On Off)
Page 199 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings Final Measurement Time Defines the measurement time for the final measurement. The measurement time is the time during which the R&S ESR measures the input sig- nal and forms a measurement result weighted by the selected detector. The measure- ment time does not include settling times of the synthesizer and the IF filter.
Page 200 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Measurement Settings LISN Type........................197 Prescan Phase......................197 Final Test Phase......................197 150 kHz Highpass Filter....................198 LISN Type Selects the V-network to be controlled via the user port. For more information see Chapter 5.2.5, "V-Networks Control (LISN)", on page 173.
Page 201 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions 150 kHz Highpass Filter Turns the highpass filter avaiable with the R&S ENV216 network on and off. For more information see Chapter 5.2.5, "V-Networks Control (LISN)", on page 173. Remote command: Highpass filter for the scan: on page 685 INPut:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] Highpass filter for the final measurement:...
Page 202 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description. Trace 1 - 6........................199 More Traces........................ 199 Copy Trace........................199 Trace Wizard....................... 199 ASCII Trace Export..................... 199 Decim Sep........................200 Trace 1 - 6...
Page 203 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec- tion containing the trace data. For details on an ASCII file see Chapter 6.3.1.6, "ASCII File Export Format", on page 399. This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs, e.g.
Page 204 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions The measurement results of the active marker (also called marker values) are dis- played in the marker field, which is located at the upper right corner of the diagram, or in a separate table beneath the diagram. The marker information includes the follow- ing: ●...
Page 205 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions on page 696 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y on page 701 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>[:STATe] on page 702 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X on page 702 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? on page 703 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y More Markers Opens a sub-menu to select one of up to 16 available markers. See "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / …...
Page 206 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions "Ref. Marker" Reference marker for delta markers. The marker values for the delta marker are indicated relative to the specified reference marker. The reference marker can either be another active marker, or a fixed reference marker ("FXD", see "Ref Fixed"...
Page 207 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Marker Track Turns marker frequency tracking on and off. If on, the R&S ESR changes the center frequency to the marker frequency when you change the marker position. Remote command: on page 687 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUPled[:STATe] Marker to Stepsize Matches the...
Page 208 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions ● "Specifying the Search Limits" on page 413 ● "Specifying the Search Range" on page 413 ● "Examining a Signal at the Center in Detail" on page 413 ● "Specifying the Suitable Peak Excursion" on page 414 Select Marker (No) Opens a submenu to select one of 16 markers and define whether the marker is a nor-...
Page 209 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Remote command: Next Peak: CALC:MARK:MAX:LEFT (<): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT on page 691 on page 698 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT CALC:MARK:MAX:RIGH (>): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt on page 693 on page 699 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt CALC:DELT:MAX:NEXT (abs): CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT on page 692 on page 698 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT Next Min: CALC:MARK:MIN:LEFT (>):...
Page 210 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Remote command: on page 865 CALCulate<n>:THReshold:STATe on page 865 CALCulate<n>:THReshold Use Zoom Limits ← Search Limits Restricts the marker search to the zoomed area. Note that the marker zoom is only available in Spectrum mode. Remote command: on page 864 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:ZOOM...
Page 211 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Remote command: Chapter 11.4.1.8, "Spectrogram Control", on page 649 Next Mode Y ← Search Mode Sets the search mode for the marker peak search if a search in the y direction is active. Three modes are available: "up"...
Page 212 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions The "Lines" menu and the "Select Limit Line" dialog box are displayed. For details on the "Select Limit Line" dialog box refer to Chapter 5.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 215. Menu and softkey description ●...
Page 213 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions └ Edit Margin....................211 └ Edit Value...................... 211 └ Insert Value....................211 └ Delete Value....................211 └ Save Limit Line....................211 Edit..........................211 Copy to........................211 Delete..........................212 Offset........................212 Offset........................212 Display Lines.......................212 └ Display Line 1 / Display Line 2..............212 └...
Page 214 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Edit Margin ← New Sets the focus on the "Margin" field to enter or change a margin for the limit line. The default setting is 0 dB (i.e. no margin). Edit Value ← New Opens an edit dialog box to change an existing x or y value, depending on the selected column.
Page 215 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Remote command: on page 706 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:COPY Delete Deletes the selected limit line. Remote command: on page 707 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete X Offset Horizontally shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times (x-axis).
Page 216 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Remote command: on page 704 CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k> on page 704 CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k>:STATe Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 ← Display Lines Enables or disables the frequency lines 1/2 (span > 0) and opens an edit dialog box to enter the position of the lines.
Page 217 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions The frequency or time lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of the diagram and can be shifted in x direction. Lables Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations in the display: ●...
Page 218 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions time range representation, negative times may also be entered. The allowed range is -1000 s to +1000 s. 5.4.3.4 Working with Lines If a line is switched on, the softkey is highlighted. Switching a line on or off 1.
Page 219 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions ● To display only the limit lines that are compatible, activate the "Show compatible" option. For details on compatibility refer to Chapter 5.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Fre- quency/Time Lines)", on page 214. 5.4.3.6 Creating a New Limit Line Press the softkey to define a new limit line.
Page 220 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Setting Description Margin A fixed distance to the limit line. Margins are not as strict as limits and belong to the valid value range, but viola- tion is also indicated in the display. Position Position of data point Value...
Page 221 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Defining a margin A margin is similar to a limit, but less strict and it still belongs to the valid data range. It can be used as a warning that the limit is almost reached. The margin is not indicated by a separate line in the display.
Page 222 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions Shifting a limit line vertically ► Select the "Shift y" button and enter a shift width for the y value in the edit dialog box. Saving the limit line settings ► Press the "Save" button in the dialog. If an existing name is used, a message box is displayed.
Page 223 ® Receiver Mode R&S Common Analysis Functions 5.4.3.9 Activating/Deactivating a Limit Line Prerequisites: The x- and y-units of limit line and current measurement setting have to be compatible. For details refer to Chapter 5.4.3.3, "Limit Lines (Frequency/Time Lines)", on page 214. The limit line has to consist of 2 or more data points.
Page 224 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements 6 Spectrum Measurements You can also perform conventional spectrum analysis with the R&S ESR. When you start the R&S ESR for the first time or after a preset, it starts in receiver mode. If it is inactive, press the [MODE] key and select the "Spectrum" softkey in the corresponding menu to enter the spectrum mode.
Page 225 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements The MEAS key is used for complex measurement functions as power measurements, occupied bandwidth, signal statistic, carrier to noise spacing, AM modulation depth, third-order intercept point, harmonics and spurious emissions. For measurement examples refer to the Quick Start Guide, "Basic Measurement Examples". The following measurements can be performed: ●...
Page 226 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Ch Power ACLR......................223 C/N, C/No (span > 0)....................223 OBW (span > 0)......................223 Spectrum Emission Mask....................223 Spurious Emissions.....................224 Time Domain Power (zero span).................224 All Functions Off......................224 APD..........................224 CCDF.......................... 224 TOI..........................224 AM Mod Depth......................224 Harmonic Distortion.....................225 All Functions...
Page 227 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Spurious Emissions Opens a submenu to configure the Spurious Emissions measurement. The Spurious Emissions measurement defines a measurement that monitors unwan- ted RF products outside the assigned frequency band generated by an amplifier. For details see Chapter 6.1.1.6, "Measuring Spurious Emissions", on page 283.
Page 228 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: on page 785 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth[:STATe] on page 784 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:MDEPth:RESult? Harmonic Distortion Opens a submenu to determine the settings for harmonics measurement and activates the harmonic distortion measurement. For details see Chapter 6.1.1.13, "Measuring Harmonic Distortion", on page 337.
Page 229 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements lution bandwidth irrespective of the amplitude distribution, without additional correction factors being required. The absolute measurement uncertainty of the R&S ESR is < 1.5 dB and a relative measurement uncertainty of < 0.5 dB (each with a confidence level of 95 %).
Page 230 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements 2. The powers of all trace pixels within the channel are summed up and the sum is divided by the number of trace pixels in the channel. 3. The result is multiplied by the quotient of the selected channel bandwidth and the noise bandwidth of the resolution filter (RBW).
Page 231 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Figure 6-2: Measuring the channel power and adjacent channel power ratio for CDMA2000 1X signals with zero span (Fast ACP) Assuming a measurement with five channels (1 channel plus 2 lower and 2 upper adja- cent channels) and a sweep time of 100 ms, a measurement time per channel of 20 ms is required.
Page 232 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Figure 6-3: Repeatability of adjacent channel power measurement on CDMA2000 standard signals if the integration bandwidth method is used Figure 6-4 shows the repeatability of power measurements in the transmit channel and of relative power measurements in the adjacent channels as a function of sweep time.
Page 233 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Results are provided for the TX channel and the number of defined adjacent channels above and below the TX channel. If more than one TX channel is defined, the carrier channel to which the relative adjacent-channel power values should be referenced must be defined.
Page 234 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Retrieving Results via Remote Control All or specific channel power measurement results can be retrieved using the command from a remote CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? computer. Alternatively, the results can be output as channel power density, i.e. in reference to the measurement bandwidth (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer: on page 746).
Page 235 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements In the R&S ESR's display, only the first neighboring channel of the carrier (TX) channel is labelled "Adj" (adjacent) channel; all others are labelled "Alt" (alternate) channels. In this manual, "adjacent" refers to both adjacent and alternate channels. When an ACLR measurement is started by pressing the "Ch Power ACLR"...
Page 236 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements The value entered for any TX channel is automatically also defined for all subse- quent TX channels. Thus, only one value needs to be entered if all TX channels have the same bandwidth. The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all alternate (ALT) channels.
Page 237 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Configuring a Limit Check During an ACLR measurement, the power values can be checked whether they exceed user-defined limits. A relative or absolute limit can be defined, or both. Both limit types are considered, regardless whether the measured levels are absolute or rel- ative values.
Page 238 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Compatibility to R&S FSP User standards created on an analyzer of the R&S FSP family are compatible to the R&S ESR. User standards created on an R&S ESR, however, are not necessarily com- patible to the analyzers of the R&S FSP family and may not work there. To store a user-defined configuration 1.
Page 239 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements └ Chan Pwr/Hz..................242 └ Power Mode..................242 └ Clear/Write................242 └ Hold.................. 243 └ Select Trace..................243 └ ACLR (Abs/Rel).................. 243 └ Adjust Settings..................243 └ Sweep Time....................243 └ Fast ACLR (On/Off)..................244 └ Set CP Reference..................244 └...
Page 240 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: on page 728 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to configure the channel power and adjacent channel power mea- surement independently of the predefined standards (for details see also "Predefined CP/ACLR Standards"...
Page 241 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements The dialog contains the following tabs: ● "Bandwidth" on page 238 ● "Spacing" on page 239 ● "Names" on page 240 ● "Weighting Filter" on page 240 ● "Limits" on page 241 Bandwidth ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR Define the channel bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent chan- nels.
Page 242 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements If measuring according to the IBW method ("Fast ACLR Off"), the bandwidths of the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically. Since all adjacent channels often have the same bandwidth, the other alternate channels are set to the bandwidth of the adjacent channel when it is changed.
Page 243 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency. Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre- quency between those two channels. This frequency is aligned to the center frequency.
Page 244 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Field Description ● TX 1-18: TX channels Channel ● ADJ: Adjacent channel ● ALT1-11: Alternate channels Active Activates/Deactivates the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of the same type Alpha Defines the alpha value for the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent chan- nels of the same type Remote command: POW:ACH:FILT:CHAN1 ON, see...
Page 245 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: on page 745 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] on page 740 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:RESult CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative] on page 743 Relative Limit ← Limits ← Channel Setup ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR Defines a limit relative to the carrier signal. Remote command: CALC:LIM:ACP ON, see CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe]...
Page 246 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:MODE WRIT, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: on page 724 POWer:MODE Max Hold ← Power Mode ← CP/ACLR Settings ← Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated, the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm.
Page 247 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: on page 835 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME Fast ACLR (On/Off) ← Ch Power ACLR Switches between the IBW method ("Fast ACLR Off") and the zero span method ("Fast ACLR On"). When switched on, the R&S ESR sets the center frequency consecutively to the differ- ent channel center frequencies and measures the power with the selected measure- ment time (= sweep time/number of channels).
Page 248 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Load ← User Standard ← Ch Power ACLR Opens a dialog to select and load a user defined ACLR standard. Remote command: Querying available standards: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog? on page 729 Loading a standard: on page 728 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet Save ←...
Page 249 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements "ON" A reference measurement of the instrument's inherent noise is carried out. The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined. The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency, resolution bandwidth and level setting.
Page 250 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Standard GUI-Parameter SCPI-Parameter CDMA IS95A forward CDMA IS95A FWD F8CD | FIS95a CDMA IS95A reverse CDMA IS95A REV R8CD | RIS95a CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward*) CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95c0 CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse*) CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95c0 CDMA J-STD008 forward...
Page 251 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a mea- surement margin of approx. 10 %. If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth (or the adja- cent-channel bandwidths) being examined, only a few points on the trace are avail- able per channel.
Page 252 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Adjust Settings softkey selects the RMS detector. This detector is selected since it correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured. The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measurement point.
Page 253 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements For this measurement, the RMS detector is activated. The carrier-to-noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain (span >0). There are two methods to measure the carrier-to-noise ratio: ● The carrier is outside the examined channel: In this case, it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the channel bandwidth.
Page 254 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements You can also query the determined carrier-to-noise ratio via the remote command CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN or CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:RES? CN0, see on page 721. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? Softkeys for Carrier-to-Noise Ratio Measurements C/N, C/No........................251 └ C/N........................251 └ C/No......................251 └ Channel Bandwidth ..................251 └...
Page 255 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Note that in the I/Q Analyzer the channel bandwidth does not change the measure- ment span or sampling rate; it merely defines the range for the carrier-to-noise analy- sis. Remote command: on page 730 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs Adjust Settings ←...
Page 256 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements New: OBW now also possible within defined search limits - multi-carrier OBW measurement in one sweep The occupied bandwidth of the signal can be determined within defined search limits instead of for the entire signal. Thus, only a single sweep is required to determine the OBW for a multi-carrier signal.
Page 257 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements A remote control programming example is described in Chapter 11.17.5, "Occupied Bandwidth Measurement", on page 1013. To determine the occupied bandwidth 1. Press the softkey to activate the measurement of the occupied bandwidth. The corresponding submenu is displayed. 2.
Page 258 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements This measurement is not available in zero span. The measurement is performed on the trace with marker 1. In order to evaluate another trace, marker 1 must be placed on another trace (see the Marker to Trace soft- key in the "Marker"...
Page 259 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements For details on the settings of span, resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, detector and trace averaging see "Optimized Settings for CP/ACLR Test Parameters" on page 247. Remote command: on page 725 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet 6.1.1.5 Measuring with Spectrum Emission Masks The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that moni- tors compliance with a spectral mask.
Page 260 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files........275 ASCII File Export Format (Spectrum Emission Mask)..........280 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements............281 Softkeys for Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask....................258 └ Sweep List....................258 └...
Page 261 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to configure the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement. The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement defines a measurement that moni- tors compliance with a spectral mask. The SEM measurement of the base unit allows a flexible definition of all parameters in the SEM measurement.
Page 262 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set (by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file). If you want a parameter set to be availa- ble permanently, create an XML file for this configuration (for details refer to "Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files"...
Page 263 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements VBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the VBW value for this range. Remote command: on page 763 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo Sweep Time Mode ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time.
Page 264 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Limit Check 1-4 ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the type of limit check for all ranges. For details on limit checks see "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements" on page 271.
Page 265 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly (see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 258). Remote command: [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:RELative:STOP on page 768 Close Sweep List ← Sweep List ← Spectrum Emission Mask Closes the "Sweep List"...
Page 266 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Note: If "Fast SEM" mode is deactivated while "Symmetric Setup" mode is on, "Sym Setup" mode is automatically also deactivated. If "Fast SEM" mode is activated while "Symmetric Setup" mode is on, not all range set- tings can be set automatically.
Page 267 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements List Evaluation (On/Off) ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the list evaluation. Remote command: Turning list evaluation on and off: on page 758 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO Querying list evaluation results: on page 726 TRACe<n>:DATA Margin ←...
Page 268 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Decim Sep ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spectrum Emission Mask Selects the decimal separator with floating-point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) in different languages. The values '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set.
Page 269 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to modify the power class settings. Used Power Classes ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask Choose the power classes to be used from this dropdown menu. It is only possible to select either one of the defined power classes or all of the defined power classes together.
Page 270 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: on page 775 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum on page 775 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum Sweep List ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask "Sweep List" on page 258 Add/Remove ← Edit Power Classes ← Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates power classes to be defined. Up to four power classes can be defined.
Page 271 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Result Evaluation As a result of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement, the measured signal levels, the result of the limit check (mask monitoring) and the defined limit line are displayed in a diagram (see also "Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements"...
Page 272 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Label Description Range Up Frequency range stop for range the peak value belongs to RBW of the range Frequency Frequency Power Abs Absolute power level Power Rel Power level relative to the TX channel power ΔLimit Deviation of the power level from the defined limit In which detail the data is displayed in the result table can be defined in the...
Page 273 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements ● ● ● Sweep time ● Sweep points ● Reference level ● Attenuator settings ● Limit values Via the sweep list, you define the ranges and their settings. For details on settings refer "Sweep List dialog box" on page 258.
Page 274 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Working with Limit Lines in SEM Measurements Using the R&S ESR, the spectrum emission mask is defined using limit lines. Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values. Generally, it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in Spectrum mode using the [Lines] key.
Page 275 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Limit check type Pass/fail criteria Indicated limit line Abs and Rel Only if the power exceeds both the The less strict (higher) limit line is displayed absolute and the relative limits, the for each range. check fails.
Page 276 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Table 6-1: Provided XML files Path XML file name Displayed standard character- istics* cdma2000\DL default0.xml CDMA2000 BC0 DL default1.xml CDMA2000 BC1 DL cdma2000\UL default0.xml CDMA2000 BC0 UL default1.xml CDMA2000 BC1 UL WCDMA\3GPP\DL PowerClass_31_39.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (31,39)dBm DL PowerClass_39_43.xml W-CDMA 3GPP (39,43)dBm DL PowerClass_43_INF.xml...
Page 277 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Path XML file name Displayed standard character- istics* IEEE.xml IEEE.802.11j WLAN\802_11j_20MHz ETSI.xml IEEE 802.11j IEEE.xml IEEE 802.11j EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_01_4_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat. A <1GHz DL EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_03_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz.xm LTE Cat. A >1GHz DL EUTRA-LTE\DL\CategoryA\ BW_03_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz.xml LTE Cat.
Page 278 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Path XML file name Displayed standard character- istics* EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_05_0_MHz.xml LTE UL EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_10_0_MHz.xml LTE UL EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_15_0_MHz.xml LTE UL EUTRA-LTE\UL\Standard\ BW_20_0_MHz.xml LTE UL *Used abbreviations: BC: band class UL: uplink DL: downlink TTA: Telecommunications Technology Association Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files The files for importing range settings are in XML format and therefore obey the rules of the XML standard.
Page 279 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements ● The "Range" element The "BaseFormat" element It carries information about basic settings. In this element only the "ReferencePower" child node has any effects on the measurement itself. The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on the measurement screen.
Page 280 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements ● The "BaseFormat" element is structured as follows: – <RS_SEM_ACP_FileFormat Version=""1.0.0.0""> <Name>"Standard"</Name> <Instrument> <Type>"Instrument Type"</Type> <Application>"Application"</Application> </Instrument> <LinkDirection Name=""Name""> <ReferencePower> <Method>"Method"</Method> </ReferencePower> <PowerClass Index=""n"">  ...
Page 281 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements </Limit> <RBW Bandwidth=""Bandwidth"" Type=""FilterType""/> <VBW Bandwidth=""Bandwidth""/> <Detector>"Detector"</Detector> <Sweep Mode=""SweepMode"" Time=""SweepTime""/> <Amplitude> <ReferenceLevel Unit=""dBm"" Value=""Value""/> <RFAttenuation Mode=""Auto"" Unit=""dB"" Value=""Value""/> <Preamplifier State=""State""/> </Amplitude> </Range> Table 6-2: Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand.
Page 282 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand. InclusiveFlag false DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute | Relative | Absolute and Rel- ative | Absolute or Relative Table 6-4: Attributes and child nodes of the Range element (normal ranges) Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description...
Page 283 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand. Unit dBm/Hz | dBm | Sets the unit of the stop dBc | dBr | dB value LimitFailMode Absolute | Relative If used, it has to be identical | Absolute and Rel- to DefaultLimitFailMode ative | Absolute or...
Page 284 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements File contents Description RefType; CPOWER; reference range setup, for details see "Edit Reference Range" on page 263 TxBandwidth;9540000;Hz Filter State; ON; Alpha;0.22; PeaksPerRange;1; evaluation list information Values;4; 0;-22500000;-9270000;1000000;2986455000;-74.762840 information about each peak: 270996094; <range number>; -10.576210021972656;-45.762840270996094;PASS;...
Page 285 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Activating Fast SEM mode "Fast SEM" mode is activated in the sweep list (see "Fast SEM" on page 259) or using a remote command. Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list.
Page 286 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Example Figure 6-6: Sweep list using Fast SEM mode Figure 6-6, a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated. The formerly 5 separately defined ranges are combined to 2 sweep ranges internally. 6.1.1.6 Measuring Spurious Emissions The Spurious Emissions measurement defines a measurement that monitors unwan-...
Page 287 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Spurious Emissions measurements are performed using the "Spurious Emissions" softkey in the "Measurement" menu (see "Spurious Emissions" on page 289). Most parameters are defined in the "Sweep List" dialog box (see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 289).
Page 288 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Defining ranges by remote control In Spurious Emissions measurements, there are no remote commands to insert new ranges between existing ranges directly. However, you can delete or re-define the existing ranges to create the required order. A remote command example for defining parameters and ranges in spurious emissions measurements can be found in chapter 7 "Remote Control –...
Page 289 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Furthermore, you can save the evaluation list to a file ("Save Evaluation List"). Retrieving Results via Remote Control The spurious measurement results can be retrieved using the CALC:PSE? command from a remote computer (see CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[: for a detailed description).
Page 290 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements As for general limit lines, the results of each limit line check are displayed (here: "_SPURIOUS_LINE_ABS"), as well as the combined result for all defined limit lines ("Limit Check"). In addition to the limit line itself, the largest deviations of the absolute power from the limit line for each range are displayed in the evaluation list if the limit check is activa- ted.
Page 291 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements 3. In the "Sweep List" dialog box, define the limit line for each range using the "Abs Limit Start" and "Abs Limit Stop" settings. The limit values are absolute values for the absolute power level. 4.
Page 292 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements └ ASCII File Export..............293 └ Decim Sep................294 └ Adjust Ref Lvl (span > 0)................294 └ Adjust X-Axis....................294 └ Meas Start/Stop.................... 294 Spurious Emissions Opens a submenu to configure the Spurious Emissions measurement and immediately starts a measurement.
Page 293 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: on page 752 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE RBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions Sets the RBW value for this range. Remote command: on page 750 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] VBW ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions Sets the VBW value for this range.
Page 294 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: on page 754 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe Sweep Points ← Sweep List dialog box ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range. Remote command: on page 756 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:POINts Stop After Sweep ←...
Page 295 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements This parameter is only available if the limit check is set to "Absolute" (see "Limit Check 1-4" on page 291). Remote command: on page 756 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP Close Sweep List ← Sweep List ← Spurious Emissions Closes the "Sweep List"...
Page 296 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements List Evaluation (On/Off) ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions Activates or deactivates the list evaluation. Remote command: on page 758 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:AUTO on page 726 TRACe<n>:DATA Details On/Off ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions Configures the list contents. Displays the whole list contents.
Page 297 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Decim Sep ← Save Evaluation List ← List Evaluation ← Spurious Emissions Selects the decimal separator with floating-point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) in different languages. The values '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set.
Page 298 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Mode Description Peak Peak value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof. RMS value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof. Mean Mean value from the points of the displayed trace or a segment thereof.
Page 299 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Time Domain Power Activates the power measurement in zero span and opens a submenu to configure the power measurement. For more details see also Chapter 6.1.1.7, "Measuring the Power in Zero Span", on page 294. Remote command: on page 801 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary[:STATe]...
Page 300 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Left Limit ← Time Domain Power Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for line 1. Remote command: on page 689 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:LEFT Right Limit ← Time Domain Power Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for line 2. Remote command: on page 689 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits:RIGHT...
Page 301 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Setting the Number of Sweep Points The number of sweep points defines the number of measurement values collected dur- ing one sweep. Thus, increasing the sweep points also increases the accuracy of the results regarding the frequency resolution. Because EMI measurements often cover a large frequency range you should define an adequate number of sweep points, especially when performing the measurement on a logarithmic axis.
Page 302 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Using Transducer Factors For more information on transducer factors see Chapter 5.2.6, "Transducers", on page 174. Performing a Peak Search The purpose of a peak search is to find signals with a high interference level quickly. Usually the peak search is done with a fast detector like the peak or average detector.
Page 303 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements and the average trace separately so that the distribution of narrowband and wideband sources of interference can be taken into account. For example, the frequency of the maximum determined with the average detector can be used for the final measurement performed with this detector and the frequency found in the premeasurement carried out with the peak detector is taken for the final measurement using the quasipeak detector.
Page 304 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements For a list and description of supported detectors see Chapter 5.2.2, "Detectors", on page 167. Filter Type Opens a submenu to select the filter type. When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the "Sweep List"...
Page 305 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values collected during a single measurement. For more information see "Setting the Number of Sweep Points" on page 298. Remote command: on page 834 [SENSe:]SWEep:POINts Freq (Lin Log) Turns logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis on and off.
Page 306 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements For more information see Chapter 5.2.5, "V-Networks Control (LISN)", on page 173. Remote command: LISN type: on page 686 INPut:LISN[:TYPE] Phase: on page 686 INPut:LISN:PHASe Highpass filter: on page 685 INPut:LISN:FILTer:HPAS[:STATe] Peak Search The reference section contains an overview of all functions that are part of the chapter and lists the associated elements of the user interface.
Page 307 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements ● Selected Selects one of the markers. The currently selected marker is highlighted in orange color. The label indicates the marker type and its number. ● State Turns the marker on and off. ● Type Selects the marker type.
Page 308 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements ● Detector Selects the detector for the final measurement. For more information see Chapter 5.2.2, "Detectors", on page 167. ● Auto Peak Turns automatic peak search for all markers on and off. For more information see "Performing a Peak Search"...
Page 309 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements ● Type Shows the marker type. The marker type is either a normal marker (N) or delta marker (D). ● Shows the reference marker. Applicable only for delta markers. ● Trace Trace number the marker is positioned on. You can turn on a maximum of six traces at the same time.
Page 310 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: Detector: ΔLimit: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:DELTa? on page 783 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>: on page 782 CONDition ? CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>: on page 782 DELTa? CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>: on page 781 CONDition ? Result: on page 783 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:RESult? on page 782 6.1.1.9 CISPR APD Measurement (Amplitude Probability Distribution) The Amplitude Probability Distribution (APD) is a statistical measurement that shows the "cumulative distribution of the probability of time that the amplitude of disturbance...
Page 311 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements ● The table contains the number of samples used in the calculation and, for each trace, the following values: – Average amplitude – Peak amplitude – Crest factor ● CISPR specifications vs R&S ESR specifications..........308 ●...
Page 312 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements The example is based on the following configuration. Center frequency 100 MHz Span Zero span (0 Hz) Unit Reference Level -30 dBm Attenuation 20 dB 1 MHz (EMI) 10 MHz Sweep time 100 ms Detector Auto Peak All other settings are in their default (preset) state.
Page 313 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements APD of a pulse signal The following example shows the APD of a pulse signal. The pulse period is 100 ms and the pulse width is 1 ms, so the pulse is transmitted within 1 % of the time. The example is based on the following configuration.
Page 314 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements The second picture shows the corresponding CISPR APD function. The probability of time at 10e-2 corresponds to the duty cycle of 1 %. The maximum level of -20.145 dBm corresponds to the peak level that has been measured in spec- trum mode.
Page 315 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements 6.1.1.10 Calculating Signal Amplitude Statistics To measure the amplitude distribution, the R&S ESR has simple measurement func- tions to determine both the APD = Amplitude Probability Distribution and CCDF = Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function. To determine the amplitude distribution ►...
Page 316 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the APD function (Amplitude Probability Distribution). During a selectable measurement time all occurring amplitude values are assigned to an amplitude range. The number of amplitude values in the specific ranges is counted and the result is displayed as a histogram.
Page 317 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Figure 6-7: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa- tion: ● Number of samples used for calculation ● For each displayed trace: –...
Page 318 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Figure 6-8: CCDF of white noise A red line indicates the ideal Gaussian distribution for the measured amplitude range (white noise). The displayed amplitude range is indicated as "Mean Pwr + <x dB>" In addition to the histogram, a result table is displayed containing the following informa- tion: ●...
Page 319 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Level values over 1 % above mean power 10 % Level values over 10 % above mean power Softkeys for APD Measurements APD..........................316 └ BW......................316 └ # of Samples....................317 └ Scaling......................317 └ x-Axis Ref Level..................317 └...
Page 320 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements # of Samples ← APD Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statistics. Apart from the number of measurements the overall measurement time depends also on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the sampling rate.
Page 321 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Display range: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 50DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 844 Range Log 10 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← APD Sets the level display range to 10 dB. Remote command: Logarithmic scaling: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y: on page 668 SPACing...
Page 322 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Markers are displayed in the selected unit ("Unit" softkey). Delta markers are displayed in % referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1. This is the default set- ting for linear scaling. Remote command: DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LIN, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing...
Page 323 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements y-axis upper limit: y-axis lower limit: 1E-6 Remote command: on page 796 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:PRESet Adjust Settings ← Scaling ← APD Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min- imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution.
Page 324 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>[: on page 795) STATe<range>] Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1. SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAR1 3ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: on page 795) STARt<range> Sets the starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms. SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STop1 5ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: on page 796)
Page 325 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements After a CCDF measurement, the results are displayed in a table beneath the diagram. Mean Mean power Peak Peak power Crest Crest factor (peak power – mean power) 0,01 % Level values over 0,01 % above mean power 0,1 % Level values over 0,1 % above mean power Level values over 1 % above mean power...
Page 326 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: on page 793 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples Scaling ← CCDF Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x- and y-axis. x-Axis Ref Level ← Scaling ← CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit (dBm, dBµV, etc).
Page 327 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Remote command: Logarithmic scaling: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y: on page 668 SPACing Display range: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 10DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 844 Range Log 5 dB ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF Sets the level display range to 5 dB. Remote command: Logarithmic scaling: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see...
Page 328 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Range Lin. Unit ← x-Axis Range ← Scaling ← CCDF Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range, i.e. the horizontal lines are labeled in dB. Markers are displayed in the selected unit ("Unit" softkey). Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1.
Page 329 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Adjust Settings ← Scaling ← CCDF Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min- imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution. Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal.
Page 330 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms. SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:PER 5ms (see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod on page 795) Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms. Adjust Settings ← CCDF Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min- imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution.
Page 331 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Defining gated triggering 1. Press the "Gated Trigger" softkey to activate gated triggering (see "Gated Trigger (On/Off)" on page 320). 2. Press the "Gate Ranges" softkey to open the "Gate Ranges" dialog (see "Gate Ranges" on page 320).
Page 332 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements 4. Optionally, define a description of the trace in the "Comment" field. 5. Activate tracing for the range by selecting "On" in the "Range <number> Use" field for the corresponding range and trace. The start and stop time edit fields are ready for input. Note: The time values have full numerical resolution and are only rounded for dis- play.
Page 333 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Trigger Offset t2 – t1 = 25 µs now the gate ranges are relative to t2 Range1 Start t3 – t2 = 15 µs start of range 1 relative to t2 Range1 End t4 – t2 = 553 µs end of range 1 relative to t2 6.1.1.11 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point (TOI)
Page 334 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Figure 6-9: Intermodulation products PU1 and PU2 The intermodulation product at f is generated by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal P , the intermodulation product at f by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal P and signal P = 2 ×...
Page 335 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Figure 6-10: Dependency of intermodulation level on useful signal level The useful signals at the two-port output increase proportionally with the input level as long as the two-port is in the linear range. A level change of 1 dB at the input causes a level change of 1 dB at the output.
Page 336 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Intermodulation-free dynamic range The "Intermodulation-free dynamic range", i.e. the level range in which no internal intermodulation products are generated if two-tone signals are measured, is deter- mined by the 3 order intercept point, the phase noise and the thermal noise of the sig- nal analyzer.
Page 337 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Figure 6-12: Intermodulation-free dynamic range of the R&S ESR as a function of level at the input mixer and of the selected resolution bandwidth (Useful signal offset = 10 to 100 kHz, DANL = -145 dBm/Hz, TOI = 15 dBm; typical val- ues at 2 GHz).
Page 338 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Softkeys for TOI Measurements TOI..........................335 └ Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta.... 335 └ Search Signals....................335 Opens a submenu and activates the measurement of the 3rd order intercept point. A two-tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R&S ESR input.
Page 339 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements 6.1.1.12 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth The AM modulation depth, also known as a modulation index, indicates by how much the modulated signal varies around the carrier amplitude. It is defined as: MDepth = peak signal amplitude / unmodulated carrier amplitude So for MDepth = 0.5, for example, the carrier amplitude varies by 50% above and below its unmodulated level, and for h = 1.0 it varies by 100%.
Page 340 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements Deltamarker 3, on the other hand, can be moved for fine adjustment irrespective of marker 2. Marker 1 can also be moved manually for re-adjustment without affecting the position of the deltamarkers. For general information on measuring the AM modulation depth see Chapter 6.1.1.12, "Measuring the AM Modulation Depth",...
Page 341 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements As a result, the zero span sweeps on all harmonics are shown, as well as the RMS values and the THD (total harmonic distortion). About Harmonics Distortion Measurement Measuring the harmonics of a signal is a frequent problem which can be solved best using a signal analyzer.
Page 342 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements where: harmonic distortion mixer level/dBm S.H.I. second harmonic intercept The mixer level is the RF level applied to the RF input minus the set RF attenuation. The formula for the internally generated level P at the 2 harmonic in dBm is: = 2 * P –...
Page 343 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements R&S ESR set to a small span. Only the frequency range around the harmonics will then be measured with a small resolution bandwidth. Measurement Results As a result of the harmonics distortion measurement, the zero span sweeps on all detected harmonics are shown in the diagram, separated by red display lines.
Page 344 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Measurements No. of Harmonics ← Harmonic Distortion Sets the number of harmonics that shall be measured. The range is from 1 to 26. Remote command: on page 788 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:NHARmonics Harmonic Sweep Time ← Harmonic Distortion For details refer to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the "Bandwidth"...
Page 345 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 6.2 Configuration Basic measurement settings that are common to many measurement tasks are descri- bed here. If you are performing a specific measurement task or using an operating mode other than Spectrum mode, be sure to check the specific measurement or mode description for settings that may deviate from these common settings.
Page 346 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 6.2.1.2 Initial Configuration The initial configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected against overload, provided that the applied signal levels are in the allowed range for the instru- ment. The parameter set of the initial configuration can be customized using the "Startup Recall"...
Page 347 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Parameter Setting noise source input 6.2.2 Selecting the Frequency and Span – FREQ Key The FREQ key is used to configure the frequency axis, to set the frequency offset and the signal track function. You can configure the frequency axis either by the start and stop frequency or the center frequency and the span.
Page 348 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration └ Manual......................347 Start..........................347 Stop..........................347 Frequency Offset......................347 Signal Track (span > 0)....................347 └ Track On/Off (span > 0)................348 └ Track BW (span > 0)..................348 └ Track Threshold (span > 0)................348 └ Select Trace (span > 0).................348 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency.
Page 349 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 0.5*Span (span > 0) ← CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 % of the span. Remote command: FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK SPAN, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK on page 823 FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 50PCT, see [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP: on page 824 LINK:FACTor 0.5*RBW (span >...
Page 350 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Manual ← CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency. Remote command: on page 665 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency. The following range of values is allowed: ≤...
Page 351 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Track On/Off (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0) Switches the signal tracking on and off. Remote command: on page 826 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] Track BW (span > 0) ← Signal Track (span > 0) Opens an edit dialog box to set the search bandwidth for signal tracking.
Page 352 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 2. To define the step size of the center frequency: a) If span > 0: Press "0.1*Span", "0.5*Span" or "x*Span" to define the step size for the center frequency as percentage of the span (see Stepsize).
Page 353 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Menu and softkey description ● Chapter 6.2.3.1, "Softkeys of the Span Menu", on page 350 Task ● Chapter 6.2.3.2, "Specifying the Span (Alternatives)", on page 350 6.2.3.1 Softkeys of the Span Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the "Span" menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys.
Page 354 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 3. In zero span, the span corresponds to the sweep time. In that case, press the Sweeptime Manual softkey and enter a sweep time. 6.2.4 Setting the Level Display and Configuring the RF Input – AMPT Key The AMPT key is used to set the reference level, the level range and unit, the scaling and the RF attenuation.
Page 355 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Noise Correction......................355 Input (AC/DC)......................355 Input 50 Ω/75 Ω ......................355 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit (dBm, dBµV, etc). The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor- tion of the measured value.
Page 356 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Remote command: Logarithmic scaling: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y: on page 668 SPACing Display range: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 10DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 844 Range Log 5 dB ← Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB. Remote command: Logarithmic scaling: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see...
Page 357 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Range Lin. Unit ← Range Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range, i.e. the horizontal lines are labeled in dB. Markers are displayed in the selected unit ("Unit" softkey). Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1.
Page 358 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Remote command: on page 845 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:OFFSet Ref Level Position Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position, i.e. the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis. The setting range is from -200 to +200 %, 0 % corresponding to the lower and 100 % to the upper limit of the diagram.
Page 359 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration The setting 75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the input impedance of the instrument).
Page 360 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is pro- vided in the corresponding softkey description. Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings.
Page 361 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Remote command: on page 829 [SENSe:]ADJust:FREQuency Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically. The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings soft- key. You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted, see "Upper Level Hysteresis"...
Page 362 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration In frequency sweep mode, the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep- ing: ● "Sweep" on page 359 ● "FFT" on page 359 (not available with 5-Pole filters, channel filters or RRC filters, Chapter 6.2.6.3, "Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type", on page 366) ●...
Page 363: Softkeys Of The Bandwidth Menu
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 6.2.6 Setting the Bandwidths and Sweep Time – BW Key The BW key is used to set the resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth (VBW) and sweep time (SWT). The values available for resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth depend on the selected filter type.
Page 364 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration └ Narrow....................364 Coupling Ratio......................364 └ RBW/VBW Sine [1/1]..................364 └ RBW/VBW Pulse [.1]..................364 └ RBW/VBW Noise [10]................... 364 └ RBW/VBW Manual..................365 └ Span/RBW Auto [100]...................365 └ Span/RBW Manual..................365 └ Default Coupling................... 365 Filter Type........................
Page 365 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration If an RMS detector is used, the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed. Thus, duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs. How- ever, the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time. This leads to a lon- ger sweep time for small VBW values.
Page 366 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span, video bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW) (not available for zero span). If you change the span, resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth, the sweep time is automatically adjusted. The R&S ESR always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal.
Page 367 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size. The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis. Auto ←...
Page 368 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration "video bandwidth = resolution bandwidth/10" At this coupling ratio, noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain. For noise signals, the average value is displayed. This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically (Video BW Auto).
Page 369: Specifying The Bandwidth
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Filter Type Opens a submenu to select the filter type. When measuring Spurious Emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the "Sweep List" dialog (see "Sweep List dialog box" on page 289). The submenu contains the following softkeys: ●...
Page 370: List Of Available Rrc And Channel Filters
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration ● Channel filters For details see Chapter 6.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters", on page 367 . Channel filters do not support FFT mode. ● RRC filters For details see Chapter 6.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters", on page 367 .
Page 371 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 10 kHz CFILter 12.5 kHz CFILter CDMAone 14 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 (20 kHz channels) 15 kHz CFILter 16 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 (25 kHz channels) 18 kHz, a=0.35 TETRA 20 kHz CFILter 21 kHz...
Page 372: Configuring The Sweep Mode - Sweep Key
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 28 MHz CFILter 40 MHz CFILter 6.2.7 Configuring the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key The SWEEP key is used to configure the sweep mode. Continuous sweep or single sweep is possible. The sweep time and the number of measured values are set. To open the Sweep menu ●...
Page 373 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode: the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings. This is the default setting. The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value (see the "Sweep Count" softkey, "Sweep Count"...
Page 374 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Remote command: SWE:TIME:AUTO OFF, see on page 835 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME:AUTO on page 835 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span, video bandwidth (VBW) and resolution bandwidth (RBW) (not available for zero span). If you change the span, resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth, the sweep time is automatically adjusted.
Page 375 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Remote command: SWE:TYPE AUTO, see on page 835 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE FFT Filter Mode ← Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size. The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis. Auto ←...
Page 376 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration – In the range from 1001 to 32001, the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 1000 points. ● Entry via keypad: All values in the defined range can be set. The default value is 691 sweep points. When measuring spurious emissions, using this softkey automatically opens the "Sweep List"...
Page 377: Specifying The Sweep Settings
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration This softkey is available in single sweep mode. Remote command: on page 857 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:COUNt Spectrogram Clear For spectrogram measurements only. Resets the Spectrogram result display and clears its history buffer. Remote command: on page 649 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CLEar[:IMMediate] 6.2.7.2 Specifying the Sweep Settings...
Page 378 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description. Trg/Gate Source......................375 └ Free Run....................... 375 └ External......................375 └ Video......................376 └ Power...................... 376 └ IF Power/BB Power..................376 └ Time......................377 Trg/Gate Level......................377 Trg/Gate...
Page 379 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Remote command: TRIG:SOUR EXT, see on page 839 TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce SWE:EGAT:SOUR EXT for gated triggering, see [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce on page 842 Video ← Trg/Gate Source Defines triggering by the displayed voltage. A horizontal trigger line is shown in the diagram. It is used to set the trigger threshold from 0 % to 100 % of the diagram height.
Page 380 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Sweep mode: ● RBW > 500 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal ● RBW ≤ 500 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal FFT mode: ● RBW > 20 kHz: 40 MHz, nominal ● RBW ≤ 20 kHz: 6 MHz, nominal Note: Be aware that in auto sweep type mode, due to a possible change in sweep types, the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting.
Page 381 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep. offset > 0: Start of the sweep is delayed offset < 0: Sweep starts earlier (pre-trigger) Only possible for span = 0 (e.g.
Page 382 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration This softkey requires the following "Trigger Mode" (see "Trg/Gate Source" on page 375): span > 0 External IF Power/BB PowerIF Power span = 0 External IF Power/BB PowerIF Power Video If a different mode is active, the IF Power/BB Power trigger mode is automatically selected.
Page 383 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Remote command: on page 841 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:HOLDoff Gate Length (Gate Mode Edge) ← Gate Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the gate length. The gate length in relation to the sweep is indicated by a line labeled "GL". The length of the gate signal defines if the sweep is to be interrupted.
Page 384: Specifying The Trigger Settings
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 6.2.8.2 Specifying the Trigger Settings 1. Press the "Trg/Gate Source" softkey to select the trigger mode (for details see "Trg/ Gate Source" on page 375. 2. Press the Trg/Gate Level softkey to set the trigger level. 3.
Page 385 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Figure 6-14: TDMA signal with GATE OFF Figure 6-15: Timing diagram for GATE, GATE DELAY and GATE LENGTH User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 386: Input/Output Configuration - Input/Output Key
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Figure 6-16: TDMA signal with GATE ON 6.2.9 Input/Output Configuration – INPUT/OUTPUT Key The [INPUT/OUTPUT] key is used to configure input and output sources for measure- ment functions. 6.2.9.1 Softkeys of the Input/Output Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Input/Output" menu. It is possi- ble that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys.
Page 387 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration Video Output....................... 384 Trigger Out........................384 Probe Config....................... 384 Input (AC/DC) Toggles the RF input of the R&S ESR between AC and DC coupling. Remote command: on page 672 INPut:COUPling Preselector (On Off) Turns the preselector on and off. Remote command: on page 931 INPut:PRESelection:STATe...
Page 388: Using Active Probes For Input
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 6.2.9.2 Using Active Probes for Input When the input from the device under test requires high impedance, an active probe can be connected between the device and the R&S ESR. The R&S ESR supports active probes from the R&S RT-ZS series when using the new probe adapter RT-ZA9.
Page 389 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Configuration 3. Connect the probe to the adapter. Once the probe and adapter have been connected to the R&S ESR correctly and the analyzer has recognized the probe, the "Generic Probe" transducer is activated and you can start a measurement. To determine whether the probe has been connected properly and recognized by the R&S ESR, use the remote control command PROB:SET:STAT? (see PROBe:SETup:...
Page 390: Analysis
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis State Activates a connected probe. Use this command to switch off the probe and measure the digital input without considering the transducer factor of the probe. Remote command: on page 822 PROBe[:STATe] Name Indicates the name of the connected probe. Remote command: on page 821 PROBe:SETup:NAME?
Page 391: Softkeys Of The Trace Menu
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis The R&S ESR is capable of displaying up to six different traces at a time in a diagram. A trace consists of a maximum of 691 displayed measurement points on the horizontal axis (frequency or time). If more measured values than measurement points are availa- ble, several measured values are combined in one displayed measurement point.
Page 392 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Functions to configure traces exclusive in Spectrum mode Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6............389 └ Clear Write....................389 └ Hold.......................390 └ Hold......................390 └ Average......................390 └ View......................390 └ Blank......................390 └ Hold/Cont...................... 391 └ Detector......................391 └...
Page 393 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Max Hold ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6 The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed. The R&S ESR saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one.
Page 394 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: DISP:TRAC OFF, see on page 849 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>[:STATe] Hold/Cont ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6 Switches the reset of the traces in Min Hold, Max Hold and Average mode after some specific parameter changes have been made on and off. The default setting is off. Normally, the measurement is started anew after parameter changes, before the mea- surement results are evaluated (e.g.
Page 395 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Auto Peak ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6 Selects the "Auto Peak" detector. The "Auto Peak" detector determines the maximum and minimum value within a mea- surement point. The Auto Peak detector is not available for SEM measurements. Remote command: DET APE, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion]...
Page 396 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: DET CAV, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] on page 853 RMS Average ← Detector ← Trace 1/Trace 2/Trace 3/Trace 4/Trace 5/Trace 6 Selects the "RMS Average" detector. Remote command: DET CRMS, see [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] on page 853 Average Mode Opens a submenu to select the averaging method for the average trace mode.
Page 397 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis This averaging method only takes effect if the grid is set to a logarithmic scale ("Range" softkey), i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values are averaged in dBm. Otherwise (i.e. with linear scaling), the behavior is the same as with linear averaging (see softkey).
Page 398: Configuring Traces
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: CALC:MATH:MODE LIN, see on page 848 CALCulate<n>:MATH:MODE Log ← Trace Math Mode Activates logarithmic subtraction. This subtraction method only takes effect if the grid is set to a logarithmic scale (see Range softkey), i.e. the unit of the data is dBm. In this case the values are subtracted in dBm.
Page 399 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis 2. For each trace you can define the following settings: ● Display Mode Clear Write ● Max Hold ● Min Hold ● Average ● View ● Blank For details see Chapter 5.2.3, "Trace Modes", on page 171. Detector Auto Select Activates automatic detector selection (see Auto Select...
Page 400: Specifying The Trace Settings
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Preset All Traces Trace 1: Clear Write Trace 2-6: Blank Select Max | Avg | Min Trace 1: Max Hold Trace 2: Average Trace 3: Min Hold Trace 4-6: Blank Select Max | ClrWrite | Min Trace 1: Max Hold Trace 2:...
Page 401 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis means that with linear level display the average is formed over linear amplitude values. The sweep mode (continuous or single sweep, for details see Chapter 6.2.7, "Configur- ing the Sweep Mode – SWEEP Key", on page 369) and running averaging apply to the average display analogously.
Page 402: Detector Overview
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis with Avg = average trace; Curr = current trace Due to the weighting between the current trace and the average trace, past values have practically no influence on the displayed trace after about ten sweeps. With this setting, signal noise is effectively reduced without need for restarting the aver- aging process after a change of the signal.
Page 403 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis several columns (depending on measurement) which are also separated by a semico- lon. Exporting a single trace vs exporting all traces Note that the file containing the trace data has a slightly different structure when you export all traces compared to exporting a single trace only.
Page 404 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Data section (traces) Trace 1: Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode Detector;MAX PEAK; Detector type X-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis Y-Unit;Hz; Unit of the y-axis Values;1343; Number of measurement points 150000.000000;3.541122; String of results 154500.000000;5.776306;[...] Trace 2: (…) Blue font: Information provided when you export a single trace Green font: Information provided when you export all traces...
Page 405: Spectrogram
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Data section (traces) Trace 1: Trace Mode;CLR/WRITE; Trace mode Detector;MAX PEAK; Detector type X-Unit;Hz; Unit of the x-axis Y-Unit;Hz; Unit of the y-axis Preamplifier;OFF; State of the preamplifier Transducer;OFF; Transducer information Values;691; Number of measurement points 150000.000000;3.541122;...
Page 406 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Figure 6-20: Screen layout of the spectrogram result display 1 = Spectrum result display 2 = Spectrogram result display 3 = Frame indicator 4 = Time stamp / frame number 5 = Color map 6 = Marker 7 = Deltamarker 8 = Marker list ●...
Page 407 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis points, depending on the dimension of the x-axis. If there are more measurement values than measurement points, several measured values are combined in one measurement point using the selected detector (see Chapter 6.3.1.5, "Detector Overview", on page 399).
Page 408: Softkeys Of The Spectrogram Menu
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis In the Spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame. In the Spectrum Analyzer result display, only the markers positioned on the currently selected frame are visible. In Continuous Sweep mode this means that only markers positioned on frame 0 are visible.
Page 409: Markers
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: on page 651 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:HDEPth Color Mapping ← Spectrogram Displays the "Color Mapping" dialog box to configure the display of the spectrogram (assignment of colors to power levels). For more information see Chapter 5.1.6.2, "Color Map", on page 152.
Page 410 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Tasks ● "Basic Marker Functions" on page 408 Softkeys of the Marker Menu Functions to control markers described elsewhere: ● "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 201 ●...
Page 411 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ POIN (see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SSIZe on page 864) Marker Zoom (span > 0) Opens an edit dialog box to enter a display range for the zoom. The area around marker 1 is expanded accordingly and more details of the result can be seen. If no marker is activated, marker 1 is switched on and set on the largest signal.
Page 412 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis ● To switch to another marker, click on the marker label in the diagram. Alternatively, select the corresponding softkey. If necessary, select the More Markers softkey first to open a submenu that contains all marker numbers. ●...
Page 413 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis ● To zoom into the display around a marker, press the "Marker Zoom (span > 0)" on page 408 softkey and enter a span. ● To link the delta marker1 to marker1, so if the x-axis value of the marker 1 is changed, the delta marker 1 follows on the same x-position, press the Link Mkr1 and Delta1...
Page 414: Positioning Markers (Mkr➙ Key)
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Func Activated marker or measurement function Func.Result Result of the active marker or measurement function 6.3.3.2 Positioning Markers (MKR➙ Key) The MKR➙ key is used for search functions of measurement markers, assignment of the marker frequency as center frequency, restriction of the search area and character- ization of maxima and minima.
Page 415 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis ● "Next Min" on page 205 ● "Next Mode" on page 205 ● "Search Limits" on page 206 ● "Peak Excursion" on page 207 ● Spectrogram: Chapter 5.4.2.3, "Markers in Spectrograms", on page 207 Functions to position markers exclusive in Spectrum mode Center =Mkr Freq (span >...
Page 416 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Searching for a Maximum ● To search for the highest maximum, press the Peak softkey. ● To define the search mode for the next maximum, use the Next Mode softkey. ● To start the search, press the Next Peak softkey.
Page 417 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis 9. Reduce the span, e.g. using the rotary knob. Specifying the Suitable Peak Excursion 1. If the Peak Excursion softkey is used, the default value is sufficient, since, in this mode, the next lower maximum or next higher minimum will always be detected. 2.
Page 418: Performing Peak Searches With Markers - Peak Search Key
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis The detected signals and their order are different depending on the peak excursion setting and the peak search method (whether the next lower maximum or the next rela- tive maximum is searched). The following results are obtained. All tests start with the marker set to signal 1 by pressing the Peak softkey.
Page 419: Measuring With Markers (Mkr Func Key)
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis 6.3.3.4 Measuring with Markers (MKR FUNC Key) The [MKR FUNC] key provides various functions for markers, e.g. ● Phase Noise measurements ● Setting reference points ● Marker demodulation ● Defining Marker peak lists ● Signal counts ●...
Page 420 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis └ Ref. Fixed On/Off..................419 └ Ref Point Level....................419 └ Ref Point Frequency (span > 0)/Ref Point Time (zero span)......419 └ Peak Search....................420 Marker Demod......................420 └ Mkr Demod On/Off..................420 └ AM.........................420 └ FM.........................420 └...
Page 421 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: on page 870 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt on page 870 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? Noise Meas On/Off Switches the noise measurement for the active marker on or off. The corresponding marker becomes the normal marker. For more information on noise measurement see "Measurement of Noise Density"...
Page 422 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search ← Phase Noise Activates an automatic peak search for the reference fixed marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep. This function can be used to track a drifting source during a phase noise measure- ment.
Page 423 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: on page 868 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X Peak Search ← Ref Fixed Sets the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:MAXimum[:PEAK] on page 867 Marker Demod The marker demodulation function sends the AM data at the current marker frequency (in a bandwidth corresponding to the RBW) to the audio output.
Page 424 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis For more information see "AF Demodulation" on page 425. Remote command: CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:CONTinuous on page 874 Squelch ← Marker Demod Activates the squelch function, i.e. the audible AF is cut off below a defined threshold level. Thus, you avoid hearing noise at the audio output when no signal is available. The squelch function activates the video trigger function (see "Video"...
Page 425 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:STAT ON, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: on page 878 NDBDown:STATe CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD 3dB, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: on page 876 NDBDown CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:RES? , see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: on page 877 NDBDown:RESult? CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD:QFAC?, see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion: on page 877 NDBDown:QFACtor CALC:MARK1:FUNC:NDBD:FREQ? (span > 0), see CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: on page 876 FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency?
Page 426 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Peak Excursion ← Marker Peak List Opens an edit dialog box for level measurements to enter the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions.
Page 427 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Decim Sep ← Marker Peak List Selects the decimal separator with floating-point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) in different languages. The values '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set. Remote command: on page 850 FORMat:DEXPort:DSEParator...
Page 428 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Remote command: on page 884 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 884 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult? Density ← Band Power Selects the density mode for the band power marker, i.e. the result is displayed in dBm/Hz. Remote command: on page 884 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE on page 884 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:RESult?
Page 429 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis Risk of hearing damage To protect your hearing, make sure that the volume setting is not too high before put- ting on the headphones. The volume for the headphones is controlled using the rotary knob next to the "AF Out- put"...
Page 430 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis The noise power density is indicated in the marker field. With logarithmic amplitude units (dBm, dBmV, dBmµV, dBµA), the noise power density is output in dBm/Hz, i.e. as level in 1 Hz bandwidth with reference to 1 mW. With linear amplitude units (V, A, W), the noise voltage density is evaluated in µV/Hz, the noise current density in µA/Hz or the noise power density in µW/Hz.
Page 431 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis The R&S ESR noise figure can be calculated from the measured power density level. It is calculated by deducting the set RF attenuation (RF Att) from the displayed noise level and adding 174 to the result. Measurement example for Phase Noise Auto Peak Search The phase noise of a CW signal at 100 MHz with 0 dBm level is to be measured at 800 kHz from the carrier.
Page 432: Lines
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Analysis All markers can be defined as band power markers, each with a different span. When a band power marker is activated, if no marker is active yet, marker 1 is activated. Other- wise, the currently active marker is used as a band power marker (all other marker functions for this marker are deactivated).
Page 433: Advanced Measurement Examples
® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples To open the Lines menu ● Press the [LINES] key. The "Lines" menu and the "Select Limit Line" dialog box are displayed. For details on the "Select Limit Line" dialog box refer to Chapter 5.4.3.5, "Selecting a Limit Line", on page 215.
Page 434 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples In the following examples, a signal generator is used as a signal source. The RF output of the signal generator is connected to the RF input of R&S ESR. If a 64 MHz signal is required for the test setup, as an alternative to the signal genera- tor, the internal 64 MHz reference generator can be used: 1.
Page 435 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Figure 6-22: Fundamental wave and the frequency and level reference point 5. Make the step size for the center frequency equal to the signal frequency a) Press the [FREQ] key. b) Press the "CF-Stepsize" softkey and press the "= Marker" softkey in the sub- menu.
Page 436 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Figure 6-23: Measuring the level difference between the fundamental wave (= reference point level) and the 2nd harmonic The other harmonics are measured with steps 5 and 6, the center frequency being incremented or decremented in steps of 128 MHz using the [UPARROW] or [DNARROW] key.
Page 437 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Two signals with the same amplitude can be resolved if the resolution bandwidth is smaller than or equal to the frequency spacing of the signal. If the resolution bandwidth is equal to the frequency spacing, the spectrum display screen shows a level drop of 3 dB precisely in the center of the two signals.
Page 438 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples The R&S ESR is in its default state. 2. Set center frequency to 1 GHz and the frequency span to 3 MHz. 3. Set the reference level to -10 dBm and RF attenuation to 0 dB. 4.
Page 439 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples 2. The level of a signal analyzer's intrinsic intermodulation products depends on the RF level of the useful signals at the input mixer. When the RF attenuation is added, the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased. With an additional RF attenuation of 10 dB, the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced by 20 dB.
Page 440 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Impact of the RF attenuation setting The sensitivity of a signal analyzer is directly influenced by the selected RF attenua- tion. The highest sensitivity is obtained at a RF attenuation of 0 dB. The attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps up to 70 dB.
Page 441 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples 2. Set the center frequency to 128 MHz and the frequency span to 100 MHz: a) Press the FREQ key and enter "128 MHz". b) Press the SPAN key and enter "100 MHz". Figure 6-25: Sine wave signal with low S/N ratio.
Page 442 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples c) Select "Average" in the "Trace Mode" drop-down menu of the selected trace. The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged. To perform averaging, the R&S ESR automatically switches on the sample detector. The RF signal, there- fore, can be more clearly distinguished from noise.
Page 443 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples e) Press the "Video BW Manual" softkey and enter "10 kHz". The RF signal can be more clearly distinguished from noise. Figure 6-27: RF sine wave signal with low S/N ratio if a smaller video bandwidth is selected. 5.
Page 444 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples a) In the "Bandwidth" menu press the "Res BW Manual" softkey and enter "100 kHz". The displayed noise is reduced by approx. 10 dB. The signal, therefore, emerges from noise by about 10 dB. Compared to the previous setting, the video bandwidth has remained the same, i.e.
Page 445 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples The noise of an oscillator is determined by phase noise near the oscillator frequency and by thermal noise of the active elements far from the oscillator frequency. Phase noise can mask weak signals near the oscillator frequency and make them impossible to detect.
Page 446 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Conversion to other reference bandwidths The result of the noise measurement can be referred to other bandwidths by simple conversion. This is done by adding 10 × log (BW) to the measurement result, BW being the new reference bandwidth.
Page 447 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples temperature (-174 dBm (1Hz)) and the measured noise power P the noise figure noise (NF) is obtained as follows: NF = P + 174 – g, noise where g = gain of DUT in dB Example: The measured internal noise power of the R&S ESR at an attenuation of 0 dB is found to be -143 dBm/1 Hz.
Page 448 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples discrete spurious signals in the channel, the channel power measurement method must be used to obtain correct measurement results. Measurement Example – Measuring the Intrinsic Noise of the R&S ESR at 1 GHz in a 1.23 MHz Channel Bandwidth with the Channel Power Function Test setup: ►...
Page 449 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Press the "Adjust Settings" softkey. The settings for the frequency span, the bandwidth (RBW and VBW) and the detector are automatically set to the optimum values required for the measure- ment. Figure 6-30: Measurement of the R&S ESR's intrinsic noise power in a 1.23 MHz channel bandwidth.
Page 450 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Measurement Example – Measuring the Phase Noise of a Signal Generator at a Carrier Offset of 10 kHz Test setup: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Frequency: 100 MHz Level: 0 dBm Procedure: 1.
Page 451 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Figure 6-31: Measuring phase noise with the phase-noise marker function The frequency offset can be varied by moving the marker with the rotary knob or by entering a new frequency offset as a number. 6.4.6 Measurements on Modulated Signals 6.4.6.1 Measuring Channel Power and Adjacent Channel Power...
Page 452 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples width can be obtained using correction factors. These correction factors are normally used by the signal analyzer's internal power measurement routines in order to deter- mine the signal power from IF envelope measurements. These factors apply if and only if the assumption of a Gaussian amplitude distribution is correct.
Page 453 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Frequency: 850 MHz Level: 0 dBm Modulation: CDMA2000 Procedure: 1. Set the R&S ESR to its default state by pressing the [PRESET] key. The R&S ESR is in its default state. 2.
Page 454 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Figure 6-32: Adjacent channel power measurement on a CDMA2000 1x signal Measurement Example 2 – Measuring Adjacent Channel Power of a W-CDMA Uplink Signal Test setup: Signal generator settings (e.g. R&S SMW): Frequency: 1950 MHz Level: 4 dBm...
Page 455 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples The R&S ESR is in its default state. 2. Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz by pressing the [FREQ] key and entering "1950 MHz". 3. Switch on the ACLR measurement for W-CDMA. a) Press the [MEAS] key.
Page 456 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples 5. Set up the adjacent channel power measurement with the fast ACLR mode. a) Set "Fast ACLR" softkey to "On". b) Press the "Adjust Ref Level" softkey. The R&S ESR measures the power of the individual channels with zero span. A root raised cosine filter with the parameters α...
Page 457 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Figure 6-35: The R&S ESR's dynamic range for adjacent channel power measurements on W-CDMA uplink signals is a function of the mixer level. The level of the W-CDMA signal at the input mixer is shown on the horizontal axis, i.e. the measured signal level minus the selected RF attenuation.
Page 458 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples 6.4.6.2 Amplitude Distribution Measurements If modulation types are used that do not have a constant zero span envelope, the transmitter has to handle peak amplitudes that are greater than the average power. This includes all modulation types that involve amplitude modulation –QPSK for exam- ple.
Page 459 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Figure 6-36: Amplitude probability distribution of white noise 3. Switch to the CCDF display mode. a) Press the "UP" key. b) Press the "CCDF" softkey. The CCDF display mode is switched on. User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 460 ® Spectrum Measurements R&S Advanced Measurement Examples Figure 6-37: CCDF of white noise The CCDF trace indicates the probability that a level will exceed the mean power. The level above the mean power is plotted along the x-axis of the graph. The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level.
Page 461 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S 7 I/Q Analyzer The I/Q Analyzer provides functions to capture, visualize and evaluate I/Q data. These functions include: ● capturing data from the RF input ● displaying I/Q data in various result types, e.g. separate Real/Imag diagrams or as an I/Q-vector Menu and softkey description The "I/Q Analyzer"...
Page 462 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu Further information ● Some general information on working with I/Q data can be found in Chapter 7.5, "Working with I/Q Data", on page 473. 7.1 Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu This section describes the softkeys and parameters of the "I/Q Analyzer"...
Page 463 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu Level ← I/Q Analyzer Opens a dialog box to define the level settings. Reference Level ← Level ← I/Q Analyzer Specifies the reference level for the I/Q measurement. Remote command: on page 889 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue...
Page 464 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu "Magnitude" Shows the values in time domain "Spectrum" Displays the frequency spectrum of the captured I/Q samples. User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 465 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu "I/Q-Vector" Displays the captured samples in an I/Q-plot. The samples are con- nected by a line. "Real/Imag Displays the I and Q values in separate diagrams. (I/Q)" Remote command: on page 888 CALCulate<n>:FORMat C/N, C/No ←...
Page 466 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys and Parameters of the I/Q Analyzer Menu Carrier-to-noise measurements are not available in zero span mode. Note: Carrier-to-noise measurements are also available in the I/Q Analyzer, but only for Spectrum displays (see "Display Config" on page 460). For general information on performing carrier-to-noise ratio measurements see Chap- ter 6.1.1.3, "Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise...
Page 467 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode Remote command: on page 725 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet 7.2 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode In I/Q Analyzer mode, the "Amplitude" menu, which is displayed when you select the [AMPT] key, contains the following functions.
Page 468 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode Y-Axis Max Opens an edit dialog box to specify the maximum value of the y-axis in either direction (in Volts). Thus, the y-axis scale starts at -<Y-AxisMax> and ends at +<Y-AxisMax>. This command is only available if the display configuration for the I/Q Analyzer is set to "I/Q Vector"...
Page 469 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode Range Log 5 dB ← Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB. Remote command: Logarithmic scaling: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:SPAC LOG, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y: on page 668 SPACing Display range: DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y 5DB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe] on page 844...
Page 470 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode Remote command: DISP:TRAC:Y:SPAC LDB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing on page 668 Unit Opens the "Unit" submenu to select the unit for the level axis. The default setting in spectrum mode is dBm. If a transducer is switched on, the softkey is not available.
Page 471 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode Ref Level Position Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position, i.e. the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis. The setting range is from -200 to +200 %, 0 % corresponding to the lower and 100 % to the upper limit of the diagram.
Page 472 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode The setting 75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the input impedance of the instrument).
Page 473 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode Repetition Interval....................... 473 Trigger Hysteresis....................... 473 Trigger Holdoff......................473 Trg/Gate Source Opens the "Trigger/Gate Source" dialog box to select the trigger/gate mode. As gate modes, all modes except "Power Sensor" are available. For details see also Chapter 6.2.8.3, "Using Gated Sweep Operation", on page 381.
Page 474 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode In RF Power trigger mode the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency. The detector threshold can be selected in a range between - 50 dBm and -10 dBm at the input mixer.
Page 475 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Softkeys of the Trigger Menu in I/Q Analyzer Mode Time ← Trg/Gate Source Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms. Remote command: on page 839 TRIG:SOUR TIMETRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SOURce...
Page 476 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Working with I/Q Data Repetition Interval Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is triggered. The shortest interval is 2 ms. This softkey is only available if the trigger source "Time"...
Page 477 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Working with I/Q Data Figure 7-1: Block diagram illustrating the R&S ESR signal processing Maximum number of samples The maximum number of samples for RF input is 200 MS. 7.5.1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth (RF Input) Definitions ●...
Page 478 ® I/Q Analyzer R&S Working with I/Q Data Figure 7-2: Relation between maximum usable bandwidth and sample rate (RF input) User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 479 ® Tracking Generator R&S Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu 8 Tracking Generator Equipped with option R&S FSV-B9, an internal tracking generator emits a signal at the exact input frequency of the analyzer during operation. The generated signal is sent to the DUT, thus allowing the analyzer to control the input frequency of the device directly.
Page 480 ® Tracking Generator R&S Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu Power Sweep......................480 └ Power Sweep (On /Off).................480 └ Power Sweep Start..................480 └ Power Sweep Stop..................480 Source Config......................481 Source RF Internal (On/ Off) Switches the selected tracking generator on or off. Default setting is off. The currently selected generator is indicated on the softkey.
Page 481 ® Tracking Generator R&S Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu If both calibrations (open circuit, short circuit) are carried out, the calibration curve is calculated by averaging the two measurements and stored in the memory. The order of the two calibration measurements is irrelevant. Remote command: on page 902 [SENSe:]CORRection:METHod...
Page 482 ® Tracking Generator R&S Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu Save As Trd Factor ← Source Cal Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 625 points. The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix.trd under "c:\r_s\instr\trd".
Page 483 ® Tracking Generator R&S Softkeys of the Tracking Generator Menu Remote command: on page 903 SOURce<n>:AM:STATe on page 903 SOURce<n>:DM:STATe on page 904 SOURce<n>:FM:STATe Power Sweep Opens a submenu to define power sweep settings. This softkey is only available if the (internal) Tracking Generator option (B9) is instal- led.
Page 484 ® Tracking Generator R&S Connecting External Tracking Generators Remote command: on page 907 SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP Source Config Opens the "Tracking Generator Configuration" dialog, see Chapter 8.3, "Configuring Tracking Generators", on page 485. 8.2 Connecting External Tracking Generators The external tracking generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the – optional –...
Page 485 ® Tracking Generator R&S Connecting External Tracking Generators Figure 8-1: TTL connection for an SMU generator In order to enhance measurement accuracy, a common reference frequency should be used for both the R&S ESR and the generator. If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available, it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R&S ESR and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R&S ESR via "SETUP"...
Page 486 ® Tracking Generator R&S Connecting External Tracking Generators Generator Interface Type Generator Min Generator Max Generator Min Generator Max Freq Freq Power Power SMC100A3 9 kHz 3.2 GHz -145 SME02 5 kHz 1.5 GHz -144 SME03 5 kHz 3.0 GHz -144 SME06 5 kHz...
Page 487 ® Tracking Generator R&S Connecting External Tracking Generators Generator Interface Type Generator Min Generator Max Generator Min Generator Max Freq Freq Power Power 10 MHz 50 GHz SMR50B11 -130 SMR60 1 GHz 60 GHz -130 10 MHz 60 GHz SMR60B11 -130 SMP02 10 MHz...
Page 488 ® Tracking Generator R&S Configuring Tracking Generators Generator Interface Type Generator Min Generator Max Generator Min Generator Max Freq Freq Power Power HP ESG-A Ser- GPIB 250 kHz 4 GHz -136 ies 1000A, 2000A, 3000A, 4000A HP ESG-D GPIB 250 kHz 3 GHz -136 SERIES...
Page 489 ® Tracking Generator R&S Configuring Tracking Generators The configuration dialog box contains the following fields: Select Selects the internal tracking generator as the current tracking generator source. "Inter- nal" is displayed as the source on the "Source RF" softkey. All tracking generator func- tions are performed with the currently selected source.
Page 490 ® Tracking Generator R&S Configuring Tracking Generators Remote command: on page 905 SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet Frequency Offset Constant frequency offset between the output signal of the tracking generator and the input frequency of the R&S ESR. Possible offsets are in a range of ±1 GHz in 0.1 Hz steps.
Page 491 ® Tracking Generator R&S Configuring Tracking Generators The configuration dialog box contains the following fields: Select Selects the specified external tracking generator as the current tracking generator source. "External 1" or "External 2" is displayed as the source on the "Source RF" soft- key.
Page 492 ® Tracking Generator R&S Configuring Tracking Generators Remote command: on page 908 SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency Source Power The output power of the external tracking generator. The default output power is -20 dBm. The range is specified in the data sheet. Remote command: on page 911 SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:POWer[:LEVel] Power Offset...
Page 493 ® Tracking Generator R&S Configuring Tracking Generators ● If the stop frequency lies above F MAX, the generator is switched off. When the generator is subsequently switched on using the "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)" on page 477 softkey, the stop frequency is limited to F MAX. ●...
Page 494 ® Tracking Generator R&S Configuring Tracking Generators Interface Type of interface connection used. The following interfaces are currently supported: ● TCP/IP ● GPIB For details on interfaces see "LAN" on page 36 and "GPIB Interface" on page 37. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:INTerface on page 913 TTL Synchronization...
Page 495 ® Tracking Generator R&S Tracking Generator Functions Frequency Min. For reference only: Lower frequency limit for the generator. Frequency Max. For reference only: Upper frequency limit for the generator. Power Min. For reference only: Lower power limit for the generator. Power Max.
Page 496 ® Tracking Generator R&S Tracking Generator Functions Table 8-1: Measurement accuracy levels Accuracy Enhancement label Reason/Limitation high No difference between reference setting and measurement medium APX (approximation) Change of the following settings: ● coupling (RBW, VBW, SWT) ● reference level, RF attenuation ●...
Page 497 ® Tracking Generator R&S Tracking Generator Functions 7. To display the reference line, press the "Reference Value Position" on page 478 softkey. 8. To enter a value to shift the reference line, press the "Reference Value" on page 478 softkey. 9.
Page 498 ® Tracking Generator R&S Tracking Generator Functions Figure 8-5: Normalized display CORR ON, see on page 902 [SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 499 ® Tracking Generator R&S Tracking Generator Functions Figure 8-6: Normalized measurement, shifted with Reference Value Position= 50% DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RPOS 10PCT, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[: on page 846 SCALe]:RPOSition User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 500 ® Tracking Generator R&S Tracking Generator Functions Figure 8-7: Measurement with Reference Value: +10dB and Reference Value Position = 50% After the reference line has been shifted by entering +10 dB as the "Reference Value" on page 478, deviations from the nominal value can be displayed with high resolution (e.g.
Page 501 ® Tracking Generator R&S Tracking Generator Functions Figure 8-8: Measurement of a 10-dB attenuator pad with 2dB/Div DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RVAL +10dB, see DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[: on page 889 SCALe]:RVALue 8.4.6 Modulation (internal Tracking Generator only) The time characteristics of the tracking generator output signal can be influenced by means of external signals (input voltage range -1 V to +1 V).
Page 502 ® Tracking Generator R&S Tracking Generator Functions Table 8-2: Simultaneous modes of modulation (tracking generator) Modulation Frequency offset EXT AM EXT FM EXT I/Q ● ● ● Frequency offset ● ● EXT AM ● ● EXT FM ● EXT I/Q ●...
Page 503 ® Tracking Generator R&S Displayed Information and Errors Figure 8-9: I/Q modulation I/Q modulation is performed by means of the built-in quadrature modulator. The RF sig- nal is divided into two orthogonal I and Q components (in phase and quadrature phase).
Page 504 ® Tracking Generator R&S Displayed Information and Errors Label Description APX (approximation) Normalization on; Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization For details on measurement accuracy levels, see Chapter 8.4.5, "Normalization", on page 494. Error and status messages Message Description "Ext.
Page 505 ® System Configuration R&S Manual Operation – Local Menu 9 System Configuration 9.1 Manual Operation – Local Menu When switched on, the instrument is always in the manual measurement mode and can be operated via the front panel. As soon as the instrument receives a remote com- mand, it is switched to the remote control mode.
Page 506 ® System Configuration R&S User-Defined Menu – USER key The instrument switches from remote to manual operation, but only if the local lock- out function has not been activated in the remote control mode. 9.2 User-Defined Menu – USER key The USER key displays a user-defined menu.
Page 507 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key For each user-definable softkey (1–8), you can define a key label and assign a settings file that is to be loaded when the softkey is selected. SCPI command: on page 987 MMEMory:USER<Softkey>...
Page 508 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key 9.3.1 Softkeys of the Setup Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the "Setup" menu. It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys. If a softkey is only available with a special option, model or (measurement) mode, this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description.
Page 509 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key └ Time+Date....................518 └ Configure Monitor..................519 └ Soft Frontpanel..................... 519 Display Setup......................519 └ Tool Bar State (On/Off)................. 520 └ Status Bar..................... 520 └ Screen Title (On/Off)..................520 └...
Page 510 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Reference Int/Ext Switches between the internal and external reference signal source. The default setting is internal reference. It is important that the external reference signal is deactivated when switching from external to internal reference to avoid interactions. When an external reference is used, "EXT REF"...
Page 511 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Basically, the dialog box contains three elements. ● A list of available transducer factors or transducer sets. The list shows the name of the transducer factor or set, its unit and its state. ●...
Page 512 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key You can define the characteristics in several ways: ● Edit a transducer factor that already exists (➙"Edit" softkey). ● Create a new transducer factor (➙"New" softkey). ● Create a new transducer factor based on an existing one ➙("Copy To" softkey). Each of the three options opens a dialog box that contains the functionality to charac- terize a transducer factor.
Page 513 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key The shift of the trace caused by the transducer factor by a certain amount deteriorates the dynamic range of the measurement results. To restore the original dynamic range, you have to compensate for the transducer fac- tor.
Page 514 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key 1 = Name and comment of the transducer set 2 = Unit of the transducer set 3 = Button to turn the transducer break on and off 4 = Table of transducer set ranges and corresponding frequencies and transducer factors 5 = Start and stop frequency of the currently selected range 6 = List of transducer ranges For more information on using and designing transducer sets, see...
Page 515 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Remote command: on page 915 *CAL? Show Align Results ← Alignment Opens a dialog box that displays the correction data of the alignment: ● Date and time of last correction data record ●...
Page 516 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key IP Address ← Network Address ← General Setup Opens an edit dialog box to enter the IP address via the keypad. The TCP/IP protocol is preinstalled with the IP address 10.0.0.10. If the DHCP server is available ("DHCP On"), the dialog box entry is read-only.
Page 517 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key LXI functionality is available only for user accounts with administrator rights. Remote command: on page 990 SYSTem:LXI:PASSword Description ← LXI ← General Setup Opens a dialog box to view or change the LXI instrument description. This description is used on some of the LXI web sites.
Page 518 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Furthermore, some special GPIB settings are available to emulate HP models (see Chapter 11.18, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 1039): ● "GPIB Language"...
Page 519 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Language Comment 8564E 8565E 8566A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure. 8566B 8568A Command sets A and B are available. Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure.
Page 520 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Coupling (FSx/HP) ← Compatibility Mode ← GPIB ← General Setup Controls the default coupling ratios in the HP emulation mode for: ● Span and resolution bandwidth (Span/RBW) and ●...
Page 521 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Display Update (On/Off) ← GPIB ← General Setup Defines whether the instrument display is switched off when changing from manual operation to remote control. In remote control mode, this softkey is displayed in the local menu.
Page 522 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Configure Monitor ← General Setup Determines and displays the configuration of a connected external monitor, if available. In the configuration dialog box, you can switch from the internal monitor (laptop icon) to the external monitor (monitor icon), or both (double monitor icon).
Page 523 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key The following display settings are available: ● "Tool Bar State (On/Off)" on page 520 ● "Screen Title (On/Off)" on page 520 ● "Time+Date (On/Off)" on page 520 ● "Time+Date Format (US/DE)"...
Page 524 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Print Logo (On/Off) ← Display Setup Activates/deactivates the display of the Rohde & Schwarz company logo in the upper left corner. Remote command: on page 979 DISPlay:LOGO Annotation (On/Off) ← Display Setup Activates/deactivates the display of the frequency information in the diagram footer.
Page 525 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Color (On/Off) ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup Switches from color display to black-and-white display and back. The default setting is color display. Select Object ← Screen Colors ← Display Setup Opens the "Color Setup"...
Page 526 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key ● "Select Print Color Set" on page 523 ● "Color (On/Off)" on page 523 ● "Select Object" on page 545 ● "Predefined Colors" on page 545 ● "User Defined Colors" on page 545 ●...
Page 527 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key ● "Hardware Info" on page 524 ● "Versions+Options" on page 524 ● "System Messages" on page 524 ● "Clear All Messages" on page 525 Hardware Info ← System Info Opens a dialog box that displays hardware information, e.g.
Page 528 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key If the number of error messages exceeds the capacity of the error buffer, "Message buffer overflow" is displayed. To delete messages, see "Clear All Messages" on page 525 softkey. Remote command: on page 927 SYSTem:ERRor:LIST?
Page 529 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key ● "Install Option by XML" on page 526 Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to install options. Install Option ← Option Licenses Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install. If an option is about to expire, a message box is displayed to inform you.
Page 530 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Service Opens a submenu that contains additional functions for maintenance and/or trouble- shooting. NOTICE! Risk of incorrect operation due to service functions. The service functions are not necessary for normal measurement operation. However, incorrect use can affect correct operation and/or data integrity of the R&S ESR.
Page 531 ® System Configuration R&S Instrument Setup and Interface Configuration – SETUP Key Selftest Results ← Service Opens the "Selftest Result" dialog box that contains the test results. In case of failure a short description of the failed test, the defective module, the associated value range and the corresponding test results are indicated.
Page 532 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key 10 Data Management and Documentation 10.1 Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key The [SAVE/RCL] key is used to store and recall an instrument configuration. The "Save/Recall"...
Page 533 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key To open the Save/Recall menu ► Press the [SAVE/RCL] key. The "Save/Recall" menu is displayed. Menu and softkey description ● Chapter 10.1.1, "Softkeys of the SAVE/RCL Menu", on page 530 Further information...
Page 534 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key └ Date....................535 └ Extension.................... 535 └ Size.....................535 └ File Lists (1/2)....................535 └ Current File List (1/2)..................535 └ Network Drive....................536 └ Map Network Drive................
Page 535 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key In the "Recall" dialog box, the items saved in the selected file are displayed. Remote command: on page 985 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 985 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:LINes:ALL on page 986 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRACe[:ACTive] on page 986 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:TRANsducer:ALL...
Page 536 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key Startup Recall (On/Off) ← Startup Recall Activates or deactivates the startup recall function. If activated, the settings stored in the file selected via the Select Dataset softkey are loaded when booting or for preset.
Page 537 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key Decim Sep ← Export Selects the decimal separator with floating-point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs (e.g. MS-Excel) in different languages. The values '.' (decimal point) and ',' (comma) can be set.
Page 538 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key Remote command: on page 944 MMEMory:MDIRectory Copy ← File Manager Copies the selected item to the clipboard. The item can be copied later using the Paste softkey.
Page 539 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key Network Drive ← File Manager Opens the "Map Network Drive" dialog box and submenu. Map Network Drive ← Network Drive ← File Manager Sets the focus on the "Drive" list. Remote command: on page 988 MMEMory:NETWork:MAP...
Page 540 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key Drive The data is stored on the internal flash disk or, if selected, on a memory stick or net- work drive. The mass media are assigned to the volume names as follows: Drive Designation Comment...
Page 541 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key Which items are available depends on the installed options. The following items may be included: Item Description Current Settings Current measurement settings. All Transducers All transducer factor files. (Note: Restoring a saveset overwrites transducer factor files on the hard disk that have the same name as those in the saveset.
Page 542 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key Contained files An iq-tar file must contain the following files: ● I/Q parameter XML file, e.g. xyz.xml Contains meta information about the I/Q data (e.g. sample rate). The filename can be defined freely, but there must be only one single I/Q parameter XML file inside an iq-tar file.
Page 543 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key <PreviewData>...</PreviewData> </RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat> Element Description RS_IQ_TAR_FileFormat The root element of the XML file. It must contain the attribute fileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition. Currently, fileFormatVersion "2"...
Page 544 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key Element Description DataFilename Contains the filename of the I/Q data binary file that is part of the iq-tar file. It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention: <xyz>.<Format>.<Channels>ch.<Type>...
Page 545 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Saving and Recalling Settings Files – SAVE/RCL Key <float>-41</float> <float>0</float> </ArrayOfFloat> </Max> </PowerVsTime> <Spectrum> <Min> <ArrayOfFloat length="256"> <float>-107</float> <float>-96</float> <float>-94</float> </ArrayOfFloat> </Min> <Max> <ArrayOfFloat length="256"> <float>-25</float> <float>1</float> <float>1</float> </ArrayOfFloat> </Max> </Spectrum> </Channel> </ArrayOfChannel> </PreviewData> I/Q Data Binary File The I/Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file (see Format element and DataType element).
Page 546 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key I[0][3], Q[0][3], // Channel 0, Complex sample 3 I[1][3], Q[1][3], // Channel 1, Complex sample 3 I[2][3], Q[2][3], // Channel 2, Complex sample 3 10.2 Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key The PRINT key is used to select and configure the printer and to customize the screen printout.
Page 547 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key The output is defined via the "Device Setup" on page 544 softkey. If the output is saved in a file, the file name used in the last saving process is counted up to the next unused name.
Page 548 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Measurement Documentation – PRINT Key ● "Set to Default" on page 545 Select Print Color Set ← Colors For details see "Select Print Color Set" on page 523 softkey of the "Setup" menu. Color (On/Off) ← Colors For details see "Color (On/Off)"...
Page 549 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Working with Test Reports 10.3 Working with Test Reports The R&S ESR features a test report generator. A test report is a document that sum- marizes the results and configuration of measurements. A test report is made up out of one or more datasets. Each dataset contains the results and configuration of one measurement.
Page 550 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Working with Test Reports You can select to include the following types of information. (Note that the Spectrum application does not support all elements.) ● Header Adds a page header to the dataset. For more information see "Designing the Header of the Test Report"...
Page 551 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Working with Test Reports ● Title Defines a name for a variable that has different values depending on the measure- ment (for example the name of the EUT). The firmware comes with some prede- fined titles, but you can change and customize each title.
Page 552 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Working with Test Reports Remote command: Title: on page 972 HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe Description: on page 971 HCOPy:TREPort:DESCription Managing Templates The "Templates" tab allows you manage test report templates. ● Load Restores the selected test report configuration. ●...
Page 553 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Working with Test Reports Test report limitations The size of the test report is limited to about 50.000 measurement points. If the number of measurement points is greater than that value, only the first 50.000 values are written to the report.
Page 554 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Working with Test Reports Adding and Removing Datasets Before you can print a test report, you have to fill it with data. Data in case of the test report comes in datasets. Each dataset contains the results of one measurement.
Page 555 ® Data Management and Documentation R&S Working with Test Reports Remote command: Select a single dataset: on page 975 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect Select all datasets: on page 975 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:ALL Invert selection: on page 976 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:INVert Select no dataset: on page 976 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:NONE User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─...
Page 556 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics 11 Remote Control ● Remote Control - Basics..................553 ● Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely..............594 ● Selecting the Operating Mode................635 ● Remote Commands in Receiver Mode..............636 ● Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode..........
Page 557 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Table 11-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Remarks Protocols, VISA address string Local Area Protocols: A LAN connector is located on the rear panel of the instrument. ● HiSLIP High-Speed Network The interface is based on TCP/IP and supports various proto- LAN Instrument (LAN)
Page 558 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics tions. Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers. 11.1.1.1 VISA Libraries VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments.
Page 559 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics – Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in stan- dard IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if imple- mented). They refer to functions such as management of the standardized sta- tus registers, reset and self-test.
Page 560 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics ● TCPIP designates the network protocol used ● host address is the IP address or host name of the device ● LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub-instru- ment;...
Page 561 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics ● High performance as with raw socket network connections ● Compatible IEEE 488.2 support for Message Exchange Protocol, Device Clear, Serial Poll, Remote/Local, Trigger, and Service Request ● Uses a single IANA registered port (4880), which simplifies the configuration of fire- walls ●...
Page 562 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics RSIB Interface Functions The library functions are adapted to the interface functions of National Instruments for GPIB programming. The functions supported by the libraries are listed in the following table. Function Description RSDLLibfind() Provides a handle for access to a device.
Page 563 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics ● Up to 15 instruments can be connected ● The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m or 2 m times the number of devices, whichever is less; the cable lenth between two instruments should not exceed 2 m.
Page 564 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Figure 11-1: Communication lines used by the GPIB interface User Manual 1175.7068.02 ─ 12...
Page 565 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Universal Commands Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus and do not require addressing. Command Effect on the instrument DCL (Device Clear) Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the com- mand processing software to a defined initial state.
Page 566 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics The submenu for setting the parameters of the remote control interface is dis- played. 4. Press the "GPIB Address" softkey. The edit dialog box for the GPIB address is displayed. 5. Enter a value between 0 and 30. Remote command: SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18 11.1.2 Starting a Remote Control Session When you switch on the instrument, it is always in manual operation state ("local"...
Page 567 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics 11.1.3 Returning to Manual Operation Before you switch back to manual operation, all remote command processing must be completed. Otherwise, the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately. ► Press the "Local" softkey or the [PRESET] key, or use the following GPIB com- mand: status = viGpibControlREN(vi, VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL) If you select the "Local"...
Page 568 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics 11.1.4.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument. For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for this section: ●...
Page 569 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Example: Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>] Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2. Different numbering in remote control For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selec- tion used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Page 570 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics ● Numeric Values..................... 567 ● Special Numeric Values..................567 ● Boolean Parameters..................... 568 ● Text Parameters....................568 ● Character Strings....................568 ● Block Data......................569 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent. Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down.
Page 571 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics ● INF and NINF: INFinity and negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37, respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument respon- ses. ● NAN: Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instrument response.
Page 572 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Example: HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1' Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. For example, a command using a block data parameter has the following structure: FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character # introduces the data block.
Page 573 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Table 11-4: Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used. Example: Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation...
Page 574 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Example: HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP command system, i.e. they have one level in common. If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in common, the command line can be abbreviated.
Page 575 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics 11.1.5 Command Sequence and Synchronization IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands: ● A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands.
Page 576 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Example: Overlapping command with *OPC The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command. Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time, setting the OPC bit in the ESR: INIT;...
Page 577 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics block overlapped execution of the command. Append the synchronization command to the overlapping command, for example: SINGle; *OPC? For time consuming overlapped commands, you can allow the controller or the instru- ment to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one of the fol- lowing methods: *OPC with a service request 1.
Page 578 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics vides a rough overview of the instrument status, collecting the information of the lower-level registers. ● ESR, SCPI registers The STB receives its information from the following registers: – The Event Status Register (ESR) with the associated mask register standard Event Status Enable (ESE) –...
Page 579 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Figure 11-2: The status-register model Description of the five status register parts The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions: ● CONDition The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register.
Page 580 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics read by the user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the entire register. ● ENABle The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit (see below).
Page 581 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Figure 11-3: Overview of status registers in receiver mode Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE) The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough over- view of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis- ters.
Page 582 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy. The STB is read using the command or a serial poll. *STB? The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register.
Page 583 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE) The Event Status Register (ESR) is the source for the registers on the highest levels and is similar to the EVENt part of a SCPI register. It is defined by IEEE 488.2. You can read out the ESR with *ESR?.
Page 584 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Table 11-8: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register Bit No. Meaning CALibrating This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration. 1 to 7 Not used HardCOPy in progress This bit is set while the instrument is printing a hardcopy.
Page 585 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Bit No. Meaning LMARgin (device-specific) This bit is set if a margin is violated (see "STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin Register" on page 583) Not used ACPLimit (device-specific) This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated (see "STA- Tus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit Register"...
Page 586 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Table 11-11: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit register Bit No. Meaning LIMit 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated. LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated. LIMit 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated.
Page 587 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Bit No. Meaning LMARgin 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated. LMARgin 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated. 8 to 14 Not used This bit is always 0.
Page 588 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Table 11-14: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer register Bit No. Meaning Range 1 This bit is set if subrange 1 has been reached. Range 2 This bit is set if subrange 2 has been reached. Range 3 This bit is set if subrange 3 has been reached.
Page 589 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Figure 11-4: Overview of status registers in spectrum mode STATus:OPERation Register The STATus:OPERation register contains information on current activities of the R&S ESR. It also contains information on activities that have been executed since the last read out.
Page 590 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Table 11-15: Meaning of the bits used in the STATus:OPERation register Bit No. Meaning CALibrating This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a calibration. Not used SWEeping Sweep is being performed; identical to bit 4 MEASuring Measurement is being performed;...
Page 591 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Bit No. Meaning CALibration This bit is set if the R&S ESR is unaligned ("UNCAL" display) LIMit (device-specific) This bit is set if a limit value is violated. STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit Register provides more information on the error type. LMARgin (device-specific) This bit is set if a margin is violated.
Page 592 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Bit No. Meaning 7 to 14 Unused This bit is always 0. 11.1.6.4 Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system.
Page 593 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Parallel Poll In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller using a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0"...
Page 594 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Example: The decimal value 40 = 32 + 8 indicates that bits no. 3 and 5 in the status register (e.g. the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte ) are set. Error Queue Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue.
Page 595 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics Event Switching on supply DCL, *RST or STA- *CLS voltage SYS- Tus:PRE- Tem:PRE Power-On-Status- (Device Clear Clear, Selected Device Effect Clear) Clear command processing and input buffer 1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINA- TOR>...
Page 596 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control - Basics The R&S IECWIN32 tool is provided free of charge. The functionality may change in a future version without notice. IECWIN offers the following features: ● Connection to instrument via several interfaces/protocols (GPIB, VISA, named pipe (if IECWIN is run on the instrument itself), RSIB) ●...
Page 597 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely The IECWIN offers an online help with extensive information on how to work with the tool. 11.2 Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely In addition to working with the R&S ESR interactively, located directly at the instru- ment, it is also possible to operate and control it from a remote PC.
Page 598 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 11.2.1.1 Configuring the R&S ESR for Remote Operation To avoid problems, use a fixed IP address. When a DHCP server is used, a new IP address is assigned each time the instrument is restarted.
Page 599 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely a) Select the "Select Users" button. b) Select the users or create new user accounts as described in Chapter 11.2.8.2, "Creating Users", on page 632. c) Select "OK" to confirm the settings. 6.
Page 600 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 5. In the list, select the appropriate connection (for example: LAN (10 Mbps or higher)). Depending on your selection (and how powerful the connection is), the options are activated or deactivated. 6.
Page 601 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Windows will then map drives of the controller to the corresponding network drives. 9. To use printers connected to the controller while accessing them from the R&S ESR, activate the "Printers" option. Do not change the remaining settings. 10.
Page 602 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 7. After a few moments, the R&S ESR screen is displayed. If a dark screen appears or a dark square appears in the upper left-hand corner of the screen, you must restart the R&S ESR in order to see the modified screen res- olution.
Page 603 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely ● On the R&S ESR, a user logs on. The connection to the controller is terminated as a result. A message is dis- played on the controller display indicating that another user has assumed con- trol of the instrument.
Page 604 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Using a web browser If you are using a web browser (for example Microsoft Internet Explorer), enter the IP address of the instrument and the port you are using for the connection into the address bar to establish a connection (for example "192.0.2.0:5800").
Page 605 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Linking the Remote Control Library for Visual Basic Programming notes: ● Outputting text using the print function Using the print method, this example displays the value of the variable MyVar in the "Immediate"...
Page 606 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Dim Rd as String Rd = Space$(100) ● Creating Wrapper Procedures for Writing and Reading Since the "VISA" functions require command and response strings and their corre- sponding length in two separate parameters, the main program code is easier to read and maintain if the read and write functions are encapsulated.
Page 607 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Initialization and Default State At the start of each program, the global variables used by all subroutines must be cre- ated. The remote control and the instrument settings will then be changed to a defined default state.
Page 608 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely END SUB REM************************************************************************* Switching the Screen Display On and Off In the default setting, all remote control commands are carried out with the screen dis- play switched off in order to attain optimum measurement speed. During the develop- ment phase of remote control programs, however, the screen display is required in order to visually check both the programming of the settings and the measurement results.
Page 609 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely REM -------- Instrument setting commands ----------------------------------- PUBLIC SUB SimpleSettings() CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FREQUENCY:CENTER 128MHz") 'Center frequency 128 MHz CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "FREQUENCY:SPAN 10MHZ") 'Set span to 10 MHz CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "DISPLAY:TRACE:Y:RLEVEL -10dBm") 'Set reference level to -10dBm END SUB REM ************************************************************************ Switching to Manual Operation...
Page 610 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Dim retCount as Long CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "CALC:MARKER ON;MARKER:MAX") 'Activate marker 1 and search for peak MKmark$ = SPACE$(30) 'Provide text variable (30 characters) CALL InstrWrite(analyzer, "CALC:MARK:X?;Y?") 'Query frequency and level CALL InstrRead(analyzer, MKmark$, 30, retCount) 'Read value REM --------- Displaying values in the Immediate window ------------------- Debug.Print "Marker frequency/level ";...
Page 611 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely eventType, eventVi) CALL viClose(eventVi) 'Close the context before continuing CALL viDisableEvent(vi, VI_EVENT_SERVICE_REQ, VI_QUEUE) 'Disable subsequent events REM Resume main program here. END SUB REM ************************************************************************ Reading Output Buffers REM --------- Subroutine for the individual STB bits ----------------------- Public SUB Outputqueue() 'Reading the output queue Dim retCount as Long...
Page 612 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Setting the Remote Control Status Registers REM ************************************************************************ Public Sub SetupStatusReg() '--------- IEEE 488.2 status register -------------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*CLS") 'Reset status registers CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*SRE 168") 'Enable Service Request for 'STAT:OPER-,STAT:QUES- and ESR-Register CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"*ESE 61") 'Set event enable bit for: 'operation complete 'command-, execution-,...
Page 613 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 'y meas. unit '--------- Trace and detector setting -------------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC1:MODE AVER") 'Trace1 average CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"AVER:TYPE VID") 'Average mode video; "LIN" for linear CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"SWE:COUN 10") 'Sweep count CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC2 OFF") 'Trace2 blank CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC3 OFF") 'Trace3 blank...
Page 614 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Carrier signal level -30 dBm AF frequency 100 kHz Modulation depth 50 % Marker 1 and then delta marker 2 are set to the largest maximum points on the trace. The frequency and level are then read. In the following measurements, the instru- ment's default setting can be used for measurements (SetupInstrument).
Page 615 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely '--------- Peak search with search range limit in y direction -------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:THR:STAT ON") CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:THR -35DBM") 'Activate threshold and set it above the AF CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT3:STAT ON;MAX;MAX:NEXT") 'Activate delta marker 3, 'set to peak and then to next peak '=>...
Page 616 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely result$ = Space$(100) CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount) Debug.Print "Marker Count Freq: ";result$ END SUB REM ************************************************************************* Working with a Fixed Reference Point The following example is based on a signal at 100 MHz with a level of -20 dBm. Thus, the harmonics of the signal are located at 200 MHz, 300 MHz, etc.
Page 617 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT:MAX;X:REL?;Y?") 'Read delta marker result$ = Space$(100) CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount) 'Read frequency and level Debug.Print "Deltamarker 1: "; result$ END SUB REM *********************************************************************** Measuring Noise and Phase Noise When phase noise is measured, the noise power related to a bandwidth of 1 Hz is set in relation to the power of an adjacent carrier signal.
Page 618 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT:X 10kHz") 'Position delta marker CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:RES?") 'Query and output phase noise result result$ = Space$(100) CALL InstrRead(analyzer, result$, 100, retCount) Debug.Print "Phase Noise [dBc/Hz]: "; result$ '--------- Measuring the noise -------------------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:X 99.96MHz") 'Position marker 1 CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS:RES?")
Page 619 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely REM ************************************************************************ Public Sub ReadTrace() '--------- Creating variables ---------------------------------------------- Dim traceData(1400) As Single 'Buffer for floating point binary data Dim digits As Byte 'Number of characters in 'length specification Dim traceBytes As Integer 'Len.
Page 620 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FREQ:SPAN 0Hz") 'Switch to zero span CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"INIT;*WAI") 'Perform sweep with sync '--------- Reading out in ASCII format ------------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"FORMAT ASCII") 'Set ASCII format CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"TRAC1? TRACE1") 'Read and output CALL InstrRead(analyzer, asciiResult$) Print "Contents of Trace1: ",asciiResult$ 'trace 1...
Page 621 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely REM ************************************************************************ Public Sub LoadSettings() 'This subroutine loads the TEST1 data record in the directory 'C:\R_S\Instr\user. '--------- Default setting of the status register -------------------------- CALL SetupStatusReg 'Configure status register '--------- Loading the data record ----------------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"MMEM:LOAD:STAT 1,'C:\R_S\Instr\user\TEST1'") '--------- Perform measurement using loaded data record -------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"DISP:TRAC1:MODE WRIT")
Page 622 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely It is assumed that the desired setting is a signal at 100 MHz with a power of -20 dBm. It is also assumed that the sixth printer out of the available printers that are listed is the one you want.
Page 623 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 'Printers require printer language 'GDI' '----- Selection of orientation (portrait/landscape) and colour/BW --------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT") 'Portrait orientation CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:DEV:COL OFF") 'Black-and-white printout '----- Configuring and starting the printout ------------------------------- CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:ITEM:ALL") 'All screen contents 'CALL InstrWrite(analyzer,"HCOP:ITEM:TRAC:STAT ON") 'Alternative: only traces...
Page 624 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely END SUB REM *********************************************************************** 11.2.4 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols The R&S ESRP supports different interfaces and protocols for remote control. The fol- lowing table gives an overview. Table 11-19: Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Remarks Protocols, VISA...
Page 625 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely ● INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional) Example: ● Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string using VXI-11 protocol is: TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR Identifying instruments in a network If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource string.
Page 626 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 1MA208: Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP 11.2.5 Configuring the GPIB Interface A GPIB interface is integrated on the rear panel of the instrument. You can set the GPIB address and the ID response string. The GPIB language is set as SCPI by default and cannot be changed for the R&S ESR.
Page 627 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely See chapter "Remote Control" in the R&S ESR user manual. See chapter "Remote Control". ● To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using the "Remote Desktop" application (or a similar tool) ●...
Page 628 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Risk of network failure Consult your network administrator before performing the following tasks: ● Connecting the instrument to the network ● Configuring the network ● Changing IP addresses ● Exchanging hardware Errors can affect the entire network.
Page 629 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 3. Press the "Network Address" softkey. The submenu is displayed. 4. Toggle the "DHCP On/Off" softkey to the required mode. If DHCP is "Off", you must enter the IP address manually, as described in the fol- lowing steps.
Page 630 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely itself. Thus, when using a DHCP server, it is recommended that you use the per- manent computer name, which determines the address via the DNS server (See "Using a DNS server to determine the IP address" on page 627 and Chap- ter 11.2.6.3, "Using Computer...
Page 631 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely The items used by the LAN connection are displayed. 5. Tap the entry named "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" to highlight it. 6. Select the "Properties" button. 7. On the "General" tab, select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter your own DNS addresses.
Page 632 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely The default instrument name is a non-case-sensitive string with the following syntax: <Type><variant>-<serial_number> The serial number can be found on the rear panel of the instrument. It is the third part of the device ID printed on the bar code sticker: To change the computer name 1.
Page 633 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely The instrument home page displays the device information required by the LXI stan- dard including the VISA resource string in read-only format. The most important control elements in the navigation pane of the browser interface are the following: ●...
Page 634 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Advanced LAN Configuration The "LAN Configuration > Advanced LAN Configuration" parameters are used as fol- lows: ● The "Negotiation" configuration field provides different Ethernet speed and duplex mode settings. In general, the "Auto Detect" mode is sufficient. ●...
Page 635 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely Connection to networks Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network, consult your network administrator, particularly for large LAN installations. Errors may affect the entire network. Never connect your analyzer to a network unprotected against virus infection because this may cause damage to the instrument software.
Page 636 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 4. In the "Microsoft account" dialog box, enter the new user name and password. 5. Select "OK". 6. Select "Finish". The new user is created. 11.2.8.3 Changing the User Password After the new user has been created on the instrument, the password must be adapted to the network password.
Page 637 ® Remote Control R&S Controlling the R&S ESR Remotely 5. Press the "Drive" list to open the network drive list and select the drive you want to map. Alternatively: ● Press the "Map Network Drive" softkey to set the focus on the "Drive" list. ●...
Page 638 ® Remote Control R&S Selecting the Operating Mode 11.2.8.5 Sharing Directories (only with Microsoft Networks) Sharing directories makes data available for other users. This is only possible in Micro- soft networks. Sharing is a property of a file or directory. 1.
Page 639 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode INSTrument:DELete <ChannelName> This command deletes a spectrum display. Also see ● on page 635 INSTrument:CREate[:NEW] ● Remote program example: Chapter 11.17.16, "Usage of Four Spectrum Instances", on page 1037 Parameters: <ChannelName> String containing the name of the channel you want to delete.
Page 640 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode ● Test Automation....................673 ● Working with Markers....................687 ● Limit Lines......................703 11.4.1 Measurements and Result Displays ● Display Configuration.................... 637 ● Bargraph Control....................637 ● Scan Control......................640 ● Final Measurements and Automated Test Sequence Control.......642 ●...
Page 641 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode .................. 638 DISPlay:BARGraph:PHOLd:RESet ................638 DISPlay:BARGraph:TCOupling[:STATe] ................639 [SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] ....................639 [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:LOWer? This command queries the minimum level of the bargraph. Example: :DISP:BARG:LEV:LOW? Usage: Query only DISPlay:BARGraph:LEVel:UPPer? This command queries the maximum level of the bargraph. Example: :DISP:BARG:LEV:UPP? Usage:...
Page 642 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: DISP:BARG:TCO ON Couples the type and color of bargraph and scan trace. Manual operation: "Couple to Scan Trace" on page 163 [SENSe:]DETector:RECeiver[:FUNCtion] <Detector>, [<Detector>, <Detector>] This command selects the detector for the bargraph measurement. Parameters: <Detector>, You can select up to three detectors, one for each active bar-...
Page 643 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode 11.4.1.3 Scan Control ......................... 640 ABORt ........................... 640 HOLD ....................640 INITiate<n>:CONMeas ....................641 INITiate<n>:CONTinuous ....................641 INITiate<n>[:IMMediate] ABORt This command stops a measurement and resets the trigger system. ABOR;INIT:IMM Example: Aborts the measurement and restarts it. Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation:...
Page 644 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Manual operation: "Continue at Hold" on page 159 INITiate<n>:CONTinuous <State> This command turns single measurements on and off. The measurement starts immediately. Parameters: <State> Continuous measurements. Single measurements. Example: INIT2:CONT OFF Turns on a single measurement.
Page 645 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode 11.4.1.4 Final Measurements and Automated Test Sequence Control .......................642 INITiate<n>:EMITest .................... 642 INITiate<n>:FMEasurement ................642 [SENSe:]DETector<t>:FMEasurement ..................643 [SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO ..................643 [SENSe:]FMEasurement:TIME INITiate<n>:EMITest This command initiates an automated test sequence. The sequence consists of a scan, a peak search and a final measurement. Example: INIT2:EMIT Starts the test sequence.
Page 646 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode *RST: QPEak DET:FME POS Example: Manual operation: "Trace 1 to 6" on page 196 "Trace 1 - 6" on page 199 [SENSe:]FMEasurement:AUTO <State> This command turns automatic final measurements on and off. Parameters: <State>...
Page 647 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: TRAC? TRACE1 The number of results depends on the currently selected number of sweep points. For each sweep point, the command returns one level value. The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set.
Page 648 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode ● 4 byte, bit 0 represents the state of trace 4 (0/1) Note: If more than 4 traces are active, the state of trace 5 and 6 is indicated by an addi- tional bit (bit 8) in the UINT32 field of trace 1 and 2.
Page 649 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Querying the status of the measurement results The SCPI parameter STATUS returns the status information for each measurement result. Thus, the number of returned values depends on the number of measurement results n.
Page 650 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode PHOLD "Querying bargraph results" on page 644. SCAN "Querying scan characteristics" on page 644. SGRam "Querying spectrogram data" on page 646 SINGLE "Querying bargraph results" on page 644. STATUS "Querying scan characteristics" on page 644.
Page 651 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: SCAN:TDOM 100 s Defines a measurement time of 100 s. Manual operation: "Fixed Frequency" on page 189 11.4.1.7 Demodulating Analog Signals ......................648 [SENSe:]DEMod ..................648 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch:LEVel .................. 649 [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] [SENSe:]DEMod <Demod> This command turns analog demodulation at the receiver frequency on and off and selects the type of analog demodulation.
Page 652 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode [SENSe:]DEMod:SQUelch[:STATe] <State> This command turns selective demodulation at the marker position on and off. A video trigger is automatically activated with the same level as the squelch level, any other trigger or gate settings are deactivated. This command in only available if the R&S FSV-B3 option (Audio Demodulation) is installed.
Page 653 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Manual operation: "Spectrogram Clear" on page 374 "Clear Spectrogram" on page 406 DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:DEFault This command sets the color settings for the spectrogram result display to its default state. Usage: Event DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor:LOWer <Percentage> This command sets the lower percentage boundary of the spectrogram.
Page 654 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode DISPlay:WINDow:SGRam:COLor[:STYLe] <ColorScheme> This command sets the color scheme for the spectrogram. Parameters: <ColorScheme> Uses a color range from blue to red. Blue colors indicate low lev- els, red colors indicate high ones. COLD Uses a color range from red to blue.
Page 655 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Parameters: <Trace> Number of the trace. The range depends on the result display. Scans support six traces, IF Analysis supports three traces. Example: CALC:SGR:TRAC 2 Assigns trace two to the spectrogram. Manual operation: "Trace to Spectrogram"...
Page 656 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Note that, depending on the size of the history buffer, the process of exporting the data can take a while. Parameters: <File> string containing the file name of the destination file MMEM:STOR:SGR Example: Copies the spectrogram data to a file.
Page 657 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode <m> 1...16 Selects the marker. Parameters: <Frame> | <Time> <Frame> (if time stamp is off) Defines the frame to place the marker on. The range is {0...num- ber of recorded frames-1} Note that in receiver mode, it is not possible to select a frame, only a time.
Page 658 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode For more information, see on page 654. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:SARea Suffix: <n> 1...4 Selects the measurement window. <m> 1...16 Selects the marker. Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:SAR VIS CALC:MARK2:SGR:XY:MAX Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level in the visible Spectrogram.
Page 659 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX Activates and positions marker 2 on the peak level of the y-axis. CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:ABV Positions marker 2 on the next higher level found in the diagram area above the current marker position. Usage: Event CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow...
Page 660 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum[:PEAK] This command positions the specified marker on the current peak level of the vertical axis. The search is performed over all frames. It does not change the horizontal posi- tion of the marker. The command is available for the spectrogram.
Page 661 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode <m> 1...16 Selects the marker. Example: CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MIN Activates and positions marker 2 on the minimum level of the y- axis. CALC:MARK2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL Positions marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the dia- gram area below the current marker position.
Page 662 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Using Deltamarkers Commands useful to work with markers in the spectrogram described elsewhere: ● on page 698 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT ● on page 698 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:NEXT ● on page 699 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] ● on page 699 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt ●...
Page 663 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode <time> (if time stamp is on) Defines the distance of the deltamarker in seconds and in rela- tion to the position of marker 1. The reference is the time stamp of marker 1. Example: CALC:DELT4:SGR:FRAM -20 Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1.
Page 664 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:SAR VIS CALC:DELT2:SGR:XY:MAX Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level in the visible Spectrogram. Usage: Event CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:XY:MINimum[:PEAK] This command positions the specified delta marker on the current minimum level of the spectrogram.
Page 665 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MAXimum:BELow This command positions the specified delta marker on the next peak level of the verti- cal axis. The search includes only frames below the current marker position. It does not change the horizontal position of the delta marker. The command is available for the spectrogram.
Page 666 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Suffix: <n> 1...4 Selects the measurement window. <m> 1...16 Selects the marker. Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the peak level of the y- axis. Usage: Event CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:ABOVe This command positions the specified delta marker on the next minimum level of the vertical axis.
Page 667 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MIN Activates and positions delta marker 2 on the minimum level of the y-axis. CALC:DELT2:SGR:Y:MAX:BEL Positions delta marker 2 on the next minimum level found in the diagram area below the current marker position. Usage: Event CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT...
Page 668 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode 11.4.2 Defining the Frequency ..............665 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing ..................665 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer ................665 [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP ...................666 [SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE ................... 666 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt ....................666 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STOP DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:X:SPACing <Scale> This command selects the scale of the frequency axis. Parameters: <Scale>...
Page 669 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Manual operation: "Stepsize" on page 179 "Manual" on page 347 [SENSe:]FREQuency:MODE <Mode> This command selects the scan mode. Parameters: <Mode> Selects fixed frequency scans. Define the frequency with [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer on page 665. SCAN Selects the stepped scans in the frequency domain.
Page 670 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Parameters: <Stop> Range: 0 Hz to fmax *RST: fmax Example: FREQ:STOP 20MHz Manual operation: "Start / Stop Frequency" on page 180 11.4.3 Configuring the Vertical Axis ................... 667 CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer ............667 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:BOTTom ..............668 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing ......................
Page 671 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y:SPACing <ScalingType> This command selects the scaling of the y-axis. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <t> irrelevant Parameters: <ScalingType> LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling. LINear Linear scaling in %. Linear scaling in dB. *RST: LOGarithmic Example:...
Page 672 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode If on, the R&S ESR selects an attenuation that results in a good signal-to-noise ratio without overloading the receiver. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: INP:ATT:AUTO ON Turns the auto ranging function on. Manual operation: "Auto Range (On Off)"...
Page 673 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode INPut:IMPedance <Impedance> This command selects the nominal input impedance. 75 Ω should be selected if the 50 Ω input impedance is transformed to a higher impe- dance using a 75 Ω adapter of the RAZ type (= 25 Ω in series to the input impedance of the instrument).
Page 674 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation: "Res BW Manual" on page 184 "Res BW CISPR / CISPR (6 dB)" on page 301 "Res BW Mil Std/ MIL Std (6 dB)" on page 301 "Res BW"...
Page 675 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CISPr (PULSe) 6 dB CISPR filter (commercial EMI standards) Note: when the filter type is queried, the CISPR filter returns 'PULS'. *RST: NORMal Example: BAND:TYPE NORM Manual operation: "Filter Type" on page 184 "Filter Type"...
Page 676 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode 11.4.6 Test Automation ● General Scan Configuration..................673 ● Scan Table......................674 ● Peak Search......................678 ● Peak Lists......................681 ● Trace Configuration....................682 ● LISN Settings......................684 11.4.6.1 General Scan Configuration ....................673 [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt ..................673 [SENSe:]SWEep:COUNt:CURRent ..................
Page 677 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode TRACe<n>:FEED:CONTrol<t> <Occasion> This command turns block data transmission during a scan on and off. The availability of data is reported in the STATus:OPERation-Register. The block size depends on scan time and the upper limit defined by TRACe<n>: on page 674.
Page 678 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode ..................677 [SENSe:]SCAN<range>:STOP ..................678 [SENSe:]SCAN<range>:TIME ..................... 678 [[SENSe:]SWEep:SPACing [SENSe:]SCAN<range>:BANDwidth:RESolution <Bandwidth> This command defines the measurement bandwidth for a particular scan range. Suffix: <range> 1...10 Selects the scan range. Parameters: <Bandwidth> Range: 10 Hz to 10 MHz *RST:...
Page 679 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode [SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:GAIN:AUTO <State> This command includes the preamplifier in the autoranging function of the selected receiver scan range. Parameters: <State> *RST: Example: :SCAN1:INP:GAIN:AUTO ON Includes the preamplifier in the autoranging function for scan range 1 [SENSe:]SCAN<range>:INPut:GAIN[:STATE] <State>...
Page 680 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Parameters: <Ranges> Number of ranges in the scan table. If you enter the value "0", the R&S ESR ignores the configura- tion of the scan table. instead, it performs the measurement based on the current receiver configuration.
Page 681 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: SCAN4:STOP 500MHz Defines a stop frequency of 500 MHz for the 4th scan range. [SENSe:]SCAN<range>:TIME <Time> This command defines the measurement time for a particular scan range. Note that for time domain scans (R&S ESR-K53), the available measurement time range depends on the resolution bandwidth.
Page 682 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode ..............680 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:METHod ............680 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges ..........681 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges:PCOunt CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:PEXCursion <Excursion> This command defines the peak excursion The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search.
Page 683 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate] This command initiates a peak search and creates a peak list. Example: CALC:PEAK Initiates a peak search. Usage: Event CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin <Margin> This command defines a margin for the peak search. Suffix: <n>...
Page 684 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <Peaks> If you have selected the "Peaks" search mode, the command defines the number of peaks to look for during the peak search. Range: 1 to 500 *RST: <Subranges>...
Page 685 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:SYMBol <Symbol> This command turns the peak labels in the diagram on and off. Parameters: <Symbol> CROSs Each peak is labelled by a symbol. The symbol and its color depend on the trace the peak is on. Peak labels are off.
Page 686 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] <Detector> This command selects the detector for the scan. Suffix: <trace> 1...6 Selects the trace. Parameters: <Detector> NEGative | POSitive | RMS | AVERage | QPEak | CAVerage | CRMS *RST: APEak Example:...
Page 687 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode WRITe Clear write trace mode. Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode. SWE:COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16. DISP:TRAC3:MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3. INIT;*WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps.
Page 688 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5, R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432) Available for networks with four phases (R&S ESH2Z5, R&S ENV4200 and R&S ENV432) *RST: Example: FME:LISN:PHAS L1,N Manual operation: "Final Test Phase"...
Page 689 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode The command is available for the R&S ENV216 network. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: INP:LISN:FILT:HPAS ON Turns on the highpass filter. Manual operation: "150 kHz Highpass Filter" on page 198 "LISN Control"...
Page 690 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode FOURphase R&S ESH2-Z5: four phases and protective earth are controlla- ble. Turns off remote control of the LISN. TWOPhase R&S ESH3-Z5: two phases and protective earth are controllable. *RST: Example: INP:LISN TWOP Turns automatic control of the network on and selects the R&S ESH3-Z5 network.
Page 691 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CENTer This command matches the center or receiver frequency to the frequency of a marker. If you use the command in combination with a delta marker, that delta marker is turned into a normal marker.
Page 692 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC:MARK:FUNC:ZOOM 1kHz;*WAI Activates zooming and waits for its end. Manual operation: "Marker Zoom (span > 0)" on page 408 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SCOupled[:STATe] <State> This command couples or decouples the marker frequency to the scan range settings. Parameters: <State>...
Page 693 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode If the power measurement in zero span is active, this command limits the evaluation range to the trace. Note: The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on ( CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:X:SLIMits[:STATe]).
Page 694 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: DISP:MINF:STAT ON Turns the marker info field on. Manual operation: "Marker Info (On Off)" on page 203 11.4.7.2 Using Markers ..................691 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:AOFF ..............691 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT ..............
Page 695 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Example: CALC:MARK2:MAX:LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Next Mode"...
Page 696 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value (i.e. in ascending X values). If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent val- ues <...
Page 697 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: CALC:MARK2:MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace. CALC:MARK2:MIN:NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Next Min" on page 205 "Next Mode"...
Page 698 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>[:STATe] <State> This command turns markers on and off. If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker, it is turned into a normal marker. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m>...
Page 699 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <Position> Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x-axis. The unit is either Hz (frequency domain) or s (time domain) or dB (statistics).
Page 700 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK2 ON Switches marker 2. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK2:Y? Outputs the measured value of marker 2. In I/Q Analyzer mode, for "Real/Imag (I/Q)", for example: 1.852719887E-011,0 Manual operation: "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / …...
Page 701 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> irrelevant Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:DELT:LINK ON Manual operation: "Link Mkr1 and Delta1" on page 408 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value (i.e.
Page 702 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum. If necessary, the corresponding delta marker is activated first. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Example: CALC:DELT3:MAX Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated...
Page 703 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MINimum:NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum. The corre- sponding delta marker is activated first, if necessary. If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace (level spacing to adjacent values <...
Page 704 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MODE <Mode> This command selects the delta marker mode. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <Mode> ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms. RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker. *RST: Example: CALC:DELT:MODE ABS...
Page 705 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Parameters: <TraceNumber> 1 ... 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on. Example: CALC:DELT3:TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2. Manual operation: "Marker to Trace" on page 202 "Marker Wizard" on page 202 "Marker Configuration"...
Page 706 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Manual operation: "Marker 1 / Marker 2 / Marker 3 / … Marker 16,/ Marker Norm/Delta" on page 201 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker. The corresponding delta marker is activated, if necessary.
Page 707 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:DLINe<k> <Position> This command defines the (vertical) position of a display line. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <k> 1 | 2 Selects the display line. Parameters: <Position> The value range is variable. The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer.
Page 708 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Parameters: <Frequency> Range: 0 Hz to fmax *RST: (STATe to OFF) Example: CALC:FLIN2 120MHz Manual operation: "Frequency Line 1 / Frequency Line 2 " on page 213 CALCulate<n>:FLINe<k>:STATe <State> This command turns a frequency line on and off. Suffix: <n>...
Page 709 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACTive? This command queries the names of all active limit lines. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <k> irrelevant Return values: <LimitLines> String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti- cal order. Example: CALC:LIM:ACT? Queries the names of all active limit lines.
Page 710 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Manual operation: "Copy to" on page 211 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:DELete This command deletes a limit line. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <k> Selects the limit line. Example: CALC:LIM1:DEL Deletes limit line 1. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Delete"...
Page 711 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UNIT <Unit> This command defines the unit of a limit line. Upon selection of the unit DB the limit line is automatically switched to the relative mode. For units different from DB the limit line is automatically switched to absolute mode.
Page 712 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol[:DATA] <LimitLinePoints> This command defines the horizontal definition points of a lower limit line. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <k> 1...8 Selects the limit line. Parameters: <LimitLinePoints> Variable number of x-axis values. Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate<n>:...
Page 713 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode <k> 1...8 Selects the limit line. Parameters: <Mode> ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values (Hz or s). RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre- quency (frequency domain) or the left diagram border (time domain).
Page 714 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: CALC:LIM2:CONT:SHIF 50KHZ Shifts all reference values of limit line 2 by 50 kHz. CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:CONTrol:SPACing <InterpolMode> This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from frequency points. Suffix: <n>...
Page 715 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Suffix: <n> irrelevant <k> 1...8 Selects the limit line. Parameters: <Margin> Numeric value that defines the margin. In spectrum mode, the unit is always dB. *RST: Example: CALC:LIM:LOW:MARG 10dB CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:MODE <Mode> This command selects the vertical limit line scaling.
Page 716 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: CALC:LIM2:LOW:OFFS 3dB Shifts limit line 2 by 3 dB upwards. Manual operation: "Y Offset" on page 212 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:SHIFt <Distance> This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically. Compared to defining an offset, this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define.
Page 717 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode <k> 1...8 Selects the limit line. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:LIM4:LOW:STAT ON Switches on limit line 4 (lower limit). CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:LOWer:THReshold <Threshold> This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines. The R&S ESR uses the threshold for the limit check, if the limit line violates the thresh- old.
Page 718 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP -10,0,0,-10,-5 Defines 5 upper limit values for limit line 2 in the preset unit. CALC:LIM2:UPP? Outputs the upper limit values for limit line 2 separated by a comma. Manual operation: "Edit Value"...
Page 719 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Compared to shifting the limit line, an offset does not actually change the limit line defi- nition points. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <k> 1...8 Selects the limit line. Parameters: <Offset> Numeric value that defines the offset. *RST: Example: CALC:LIM2:UPP:OFFS 3dB...
Page 720 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:UPPer:STATe <State> This command turns a lower limit line on and off. Before you can use this command, you have to select a limit line with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:NAME. The limit check is turned on separately. For more information see "Using Frequency Lines"...
Page 721 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Receiver Mode Suffix: <n> irrelevant <k> irrelevant Example: CALC:LIM:CLE Deletes the result of the limit check. Usage: Event CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:FAIL? This command queries the result of a limit check. Note that for SEM measurements, the limit line suffix <k> is irrelevant, as only one spe- cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class.
Page 722 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:LIM:STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1. Manual operation: "Select Traces to check" on page 210 "Deselect All" on page 210 11.5 Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode The following remote commands configure and perform spectrum measurements.
Page 723 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect <MeasType> This command selects – and switches on – the specified power measurement type in the window specified by the suffix <n>. The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe:POWer subsystem.
Page 724 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Ch Power ACLR" on page 223 "OBW (span > 0)" on page 223 "Ch Power ACLR" on page 236 "C/N" on page 251 "C/No" on page 251 "OBW" on page 254 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? <ResultType>...
Page 725 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode AOBW (AllOccupiedBandWidth) Returns the occupied bandwidth, as well as the position and level of the temporary markers T1 and T2 used to calculate the occupied bandwidth. The syntax of the result is: <Occupied bandwidth>,<T1 x-value>,<T1 y-value>,<T2 x- value>,<T2 y-value>...
Page 726 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode MCACpower Channel/adjacent-channel power measurement with several car- rier signals Results are output in the following sequence, separated by com- mas: Power of carrier signal 1 to 18s in ascending order Total power of all carrier signals Power of lower adjacent channel Power of upper adjacent channel...
Page 727 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] <State> This command switches off the power measurement in the window specified by the suffix <n>. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <State> Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW OFF Switches off the power measurement.
Page 728 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]POWer:TRACe <TraceNumber> This command assigns the channel/adjacent channel power measurement to the indi- cated trace. The corresponding trace must be active, i.e. its state must be different from blank. Note:The measurement of the occupied bandwidth (OBW) is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is positioned.
Page 729 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and – if required – switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement. This ensures that the signal path of the instrument is not overloaded. Since the measure- ment bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power measurements, the signal path can be overloaded although the trace is still signifi- cantly below the reference level.
Page 730 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 264 "List Evaluation (On/Off)" on page 293 Table 11-21: Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have been measured. The number of power levels in the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points.
Page 731 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:PRESet <Standard> | <UserStandard> This command selects the power measurement setting for a standard and switches on the corresponding measurement, if required. The configuration for a standard comprises of the parameters weighting filter, channel bandwidth and spacing, resolution and video bandwidth, as well as detector and sweep time.
Page 732 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "CP/ACLR Standard" on page 236 "Load" on page 245 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:STANdard:CATalog? This command queries all available standards, including user standards. The numeric suffix at MARKer is irrelevant. Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:POW:STAN:CAT? Queries the available standards.
Page 733 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ............. 732 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:CHANnel<channel> ............. 732 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing[:ACHannel] ..........733 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel> ..........733 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:CHANnel<channel> ..............733 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:TXCHannel:COUNt [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:ACPairs <ChannelPairs> This command sets the number of adjacent channels (upper and lower channel in pairs).The figure 0 stands for pure channel power measurement. Parameters: <ChannelPairs>...
Page 734 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode With [SENSe<source>:]POWer:HSPeed set to ON, steep-edged channel filters are available. For further information on filters refer to Chapter 6.2.6.4, "List of Available RRC and Channel Filters", on page 367 . Suffix: <channel>...
Page 735 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:NAME:ALTernate<channel> <Name> This command defines a name for the specified alternate channel. The name is dis- played in the result diagram and the result table. Suffix: <channel> 1...11 the alternate channel Parameters: <Name>...
Page 736 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:SPACing:ALTernate<channel> <Spacing> This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel (ALT1, ALT2, ...). A modification of a higher adjacent-channel spacing cau- ses a change by the same factor (new spacing value/old spacing value) in all higher adjacent-channel spacings, while the lower adjacent-channel spacings remain unchanged.
Page 737 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "# of TX Chan" on page 237 Defining Weighting Filters The following commands define weighting filters for ACLR measurements............734 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ACHannel ............... 734 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa[:ALL] ......... 734 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:ALTernate<channel> ..........
Page 738 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Weighting Filter" on page 240 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer:ALPHa:CHANnel<channel> <Alpha> This command defines the roll-off factor for the weighting filter of the specified TX channel. Suffix: <channel> 1...11 the TX channel Parameters: <Alpha>...
Page 739 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <channel> 1...18 the TX channel Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: POW:ACH:FILT:CHA3 ON Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 3. Manual operation: "Weighting Filter" on page 240 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:FILTer[:STATe]:ALL <State>...
Page 740 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent-channel power measurements with span > 0 ( CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer: on page 720). SELect Parameters: <Channel> MINimum | MAXimum | LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power...
Page 741 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ......743 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>[:RELative]:STATe ........744 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:RESult? ............... 745 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel:ABSolute <LowerLimit>, <UpperLimit> This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower/upper adjacent channel during adjacent-channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power). Note that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:...
Page 742 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH 30DB, 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power. CALC:LIM:ACP:ACH:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
Page 743 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ACHannel[:RELative]:STATe <State> This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent chan- nel when adjacent-channel power measurement is performed. Before this command, the limit check must be activated using CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[: STATe].
Page 744 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Return values: Result The result is returned in the form <result>, <result> where <result> = PASSED | FAILED, and where the first returned value denotes the lower, the second denotes the upper adjacent chan- nel.
Page 745 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<Channel>:ABSolute:STATe <State> This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adja- cent-channel power measurement (Adjacent Channel Power). Before the command, the limit check must be globally switched on for the channel/ adjacent-channel power with the CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower[:STATe] command.
Page 746 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ACPower:ALTernate<channel>[:RELative] <LowerLimit>, <UpperLimit> This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent chan- nel power measurements. The reference value for the relative limit value is the mea- sured channel power.
Page 747 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power.
Page 748 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2 30DB, 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power. CALC:LIM:ACP:ALT2:ABS -35DBM, -35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to -35 dBm.
Page 749 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ..........746 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ .................. 746 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:MODE ....................747 [SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed ..................747 [SENSe:]POWer:NCORrection CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult:PHZ <State> This command switches the query response of the power measurement results between output of absolute values and output referred to the measurement bandwith. The measurement results are output with the CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>: command.
Page 750 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: POW:ACH:MODE REL Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative. Manual operation: "ACLR (Abs/Rel)" on page 243 [SENSe:]POWer:HSPeed <State> This command switches on or off the high-speed channel/adjacent channel power measurement.
Page 751 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Predefined CP/ACLR Standards Parameter Standard W-CDMA 3GPP FWD W-CDMA 3.84 MHz forward W-CDMA 3GPP REV W-CDMA 3.84 MHz reverse CDMA IS95A FWD CDMA IS95A forward CDMA IS95A REV CDMA IS95A reverse CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV...
Page 752 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>] on page 731 ● on page 725 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet ● on page 726 [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:PRESet:RLEVel ● on page 726 TRACe<n>:DATA ................749 [SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth [SENSe:]POWer:BANDwidth|BWIDth <Percentage> This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power. This value is the basis for the occupied bandwidth measurement (see [SENSe: on page 725).
Page 753 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode MMEMory:STORe<n>:SPURious <FileName> This command exports the marker peak list available for spurious emission measure- ments to a file. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <FileName> String containing the path and name of the target file. Example: MMEM:STOR:SPUR 'test' Saves the current marker peak list in the file test.dat.
Page 754 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: LIST:RANG2:BAND:RES 5000 Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz. Manual operation: "RBW" on page 290 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo This command sets the VBW value for the specified range. Suffix: <range>...
Page 755 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: LIST:RANG:COUNt? Returns the number of defined ranges. [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:DELete This command deletes the specified range. The range numbers are updated accord- ingly. The reference range cannot be deleted. A minimum of three ranges is manda- tory.
Page 756 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <range> 1...20 range Parameters: <Type> NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC filters 5 Pole filters *RST: NORM The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data sheet.
Page 757 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <range> 1...20 range Parameters: <Frequency> see rules in chapter 4, "Ranges and settings" *RST: -2.52 MHz (range 1), 2.52 MHz (range 2), 250.0 MHz (range 3) Example: LIST:RANG3:STOP 10000000 Sets the stop frequency for range 2 to 10 MHz.
Page 758 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <range> 1...20 range Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: LIST:RANG3:INP:GAIN:STATe ON Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off. Manual operation: "Preamp" on page 290 [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STARt <Limit> This command sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the specified range.
Page 759 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:LIMit:STOP <Limit> This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range. Different from manual operation, this setting is independent of the defined limit check type. Suffix: <range>...
Page 760 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]LIST:RANGe<range>:SWEep:TIME This command sets the sweep time for the specified range. Suffix: <range> 1...20 range Parameters: <SweepTime> Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW.
Page 761 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Transd. Factor" on page 291 Configuring List Evaluation The following commands configure the list evaluation. ● on page 680 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:MARGin ● on page 777 MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST ............758 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch[:IMMediate] ..............
Page 762 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares. Manual operation: "Show Peaks" on page 293 CALCulate<n>:PEAKsearch|PSEarch:SUBRanges <NumberPeaks> This command sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list. Once the selected number of peaks has been reached, the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range.
Page 763 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ..............760 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:RESTore .................760 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet[:STANdard] ................760 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:RESTore ................760 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:PRESet:STORe CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement. All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the fac- tory-set values are restored.
Page 764 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <FileName> Example: ESP:PRES:STOR 'WCDMA\3GPP\DL\PowerClass_31_39.xml' Stores the settins in the PowerClass_31_39.xml file in the C: \R_S\instr\sem_std\WCDMA\3GPP\DL directory. Manual operation: "Save As Standard" on page 267 Controlling the Measurement The following commands control the measurement itself....................
Page 765 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Managing a Sweep List The following commands define a sweep list for SEM measurements..................762 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed .......... 763 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] ........... 763 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth:VIDeo ..............764 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:COUNt ..............764 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete ............764 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:FILTer:TYPE ..........765 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt...
Page 766 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ● Rf Attenuation, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut: on page 766 ATTenuation ● Preamp, see [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:GAIN:STATe on page 766 Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: ESP:HSP ON Manual operation: "Fast SEM" on page 259 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <Value>...
Page 767 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:COUNt This command returns the number of defined ranges. Suffix: <range> 1...20 range Example: ESP:RANG:COUNt? Returns the number of defined ranges. [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:DELete This command deletes the specified range. The range numbers are updated accord- ingly.
Page 768 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Filter Type" on page 259 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>[:FREQuency]:STARt <Frequency> This command sets the start frequency for the specified range. In order to change the start/stop frequency of the first/last range, select the appropriate span.
Page 769 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INPut:ATTenuation <Value> This command sets the attenuation for the specified range. Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated (see on page 762). [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed Suffix: <range>...
Page 770 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: ESP:RANG3:INP:GAIN:STATe ON Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off. Manual operation: "Preamp" on page 260 [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:INSert <Mode> This command inserts a new range before or after the specified range. The range num- bers are updated accordingly.
Page 771 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <range> 1...20 range Parameters: <Level> -400 to in 400 dBm *RST: 13 dBm Example: ESP:RANG1:LIM:ABS:STOP 20 Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the range.
Page 772 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]ESPectrum:RANGe<range>:LIMit<source>:STATe <State> This command sets the type of limit check for all ranges. Suffix: <range> irrelevant Parameters: <State> ABSolute | RELative | AND | OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined. RELative Checks only the relative limits.
Page 773 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if "Fast SEM" mode is activated (see on page 762). [SENSe:]ESPectrum:HighSPeed Suffix: <range> 1...20 range Parameters: <SweepTime> Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW.
Page 774 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: ESP:RANG1:TRAN 'test' Sets the transducer called test for range 1. Manual operation: "Transd. Factor" on page 260 Configuring the Reference Range The following commands define the reference range for the SEM sweep list....................
Page 775 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]ESPectrum:FILTer[:RRC][:STATe] <State> This command activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter. This setting only takes effect if channel power is selected as power reference type (see [SENSe: on page 772). ]ESPectrum:RTYPe Parameters: <State>...
Page 776 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ........775 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MAXimum ..........775 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:MINimum ..............776 CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:VALue CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:LIMits <Limits> This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <k> irrelevant Parameters: <Limits> 1–3 numeric values between -200 and 200, separated by com- -200, <0-3 numeric values between -200 and 200, in ascending order, separated by commas>, 200...
Page 777 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>:COUNt <NoPowerClasses> This command sets the number of power classes to be defined. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <k> irrelevant <Class> irrelevant Parameters: <NoPowerClasses> 1 to 4 *RST: Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL:COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined. CALCulate<n>:LIMit<k>:ESPectrum:PCLass<Class>[:EXCLusive] <State>...
Page 778 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values. A negative result is returned if both limits fail. Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values.
Page 779 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <Class> 1...4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters: <Level> <numeric_value> *RST: -200 for class1, otherwise +200 Example: CALC:LIM:ESP:PCL2:MIN -40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to -40 dBm.
Page 780 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode MMEMory:STORe<n>:LIST <FileName> This command stores the current list evaluation results in a <file name>.dat file. The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <FileName>...
Page 781 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:ESP:PSE:MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB. CALCulate<n>:ESPectrum:PSEarch|:PEAKsearch:PSHow <State> This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example:...
Page 782 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Remote commands exclusive to EMI measurements: ........... 779 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:STATe CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:STATe <State> This command turns the EMI measurement marker functionality on and off. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <m> irrelevant Parameters: <State> ON | OFF Performing a Peak Search Commands useful to perform EMI measurements described elsewhere: ●...
Page 783 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode maximum peak detector quasipeak detector *RST: Manual operation: "Marker Configuration" on page 303 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:DETector <Detector> This command selects the detector for a specific marker during the final measurement. If the marker hasn't been active yet, the command also turns the marker on. Suffix: <n>...
Page 784 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:PSEarch:AUTO This command initiates a marker peak search. Instead of the syntax element PSEarch you can also use PEAKsearch. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <m> irrelevant Usage: Event Manual operation: "Auto Peak Search" on page 303 "Marker Configuration"...
Page 785 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FMEasurement:LIMit<k>:DELTa? This command queries the vertical distance from the deltamarker position to the limit line. The unit is dB. If the deltamarker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line, the com- mand returns -200.
Page 786 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <m> 1...16 marker <k> 1...8 limit line Return values: <Condition> The marker has passed the limit check. The marker is inside the margins of a limit line. The marker has failed the limit check. Example: CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:LIM2:COND? Queries the condition of marker 1 in relation to limit line 2.
Page 787 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <m> 1...16 marker Return values: <Result> Power level. The unit depends on the one you have currently set. Example: CALC:MARK1:FUNC:FME:RES? Queries the result of marker 1. Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Marker Table"...
Page 788 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to the carrier signal at 10 MHz. CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON Switches on the modulation depth measurement. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
Page 789 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:MARK:X 10MHZ Sets the reference marker (marker 1) to the carrier signal at 10 MHz. CALC:MARK:FUNC:MDEP ON Switches on the modulation depth measurement. CALC:DELT2:X 10KHZ Sets delta markers 2 and 3 to the signals at 10 kHz from the car- rier signal.
Page 790 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Harmonic RBW Auto" on page 341 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics:DISTortion? This command queries the total harmonic distortion of the signal. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 791 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <Harmonics> Returns one value for every harmonic. The first value is the absolute power of the first harmonic. The unit is variable. The other values are power levels relative to the first harmonic.
Page 792 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> irrelevant Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:HARM:PRES Optimizes the device settings for the harmonic measurement. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Adjust Settings" on page 341 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:HARMonics[:STATe] <State> This command turns the harmonic distortion measurement on and off. Note the following: ●...
Page 793 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode 11.5.1.9 Measuring the Carrier-to-Noise Ratio Commands useful to measure the C/N ratio described elsewhere: ● on page 721 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:RESult? ● on page 720 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer:SELect ● on page 724 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:POWer[:STATe] ● [SENSe:]POWer:ACHannel:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:CHANnel<channel>] on page 731 ●...
Page 794 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode The third-order intercept is calculated from the level spacing between the normal mark- ers and the delta markers. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> irrelevant Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:TOI ON...
Page 795 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ● Configuring Statistical Measurements..............792 ● Retrieving Results....................793 ● Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements..........794 ● Scaling the Diagram....................796 Configuring Statistical Measurements The following commands configure the measurement................792 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:APD[:STATe] .................
Page 796 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:STATistics:NSAMples <NoMeasPoints> This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statisti- cal measurement functions. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <NoMeasPoints> 100 to 1E9 *RST: 100000 Example: CALC:STAT:NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500.
Page 797 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:STATistics:RESult<Trace> <ResultType> This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <Trace> 1...6 trace Parameters: <ResultType> MEAN | PEAK | CFACtor | ALL MEAN Average (=RMS) power in dBm measured during the measure- ment time.
Page 798 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Gate Ranges" on page 320 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: PERiod <Value> This command defines the length of the period to be traced using gated triggering. Suffix: <k> 1...6 trace Parameters: <Value> <numeric value>...
Page 799 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: SWE:EGAT:TRAC1:STAT1 ON Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1. Manual operation: "Gate Ranges" on page 320 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TRACe<k>: STOP<range> <Value> This command defines the stopping point for the range to be traced using gated trig- gering Suffix: <k>...
Page 800 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode y-axis upper limit: y-axis lower limit: 1E-6 Suffix: <n> irrelevant Example: CALC:STAT:PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions Manual operation: "Default Settings" on page 319 CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:AUTO ONCE This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the mea- sured peak power, in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity.
Page 801 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:X:RLEVel <Value> This command defines the reference level for the x-axis of the measurement diagram. The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay[: command. WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel With the reference level offset <> 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the offset.
Page 802 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:STATistics:SCALe:Y:UPPer <Value> This command defines the upper limit for the y-axis of the diagram in statistical mea- surements. Since probabilities are specified on the y-axis, the entered numeric values are dimensionless. Suffix: <n>...
Page 803 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode The number of results required for the calculation of average is defined with [SENSe: ]AVERage<n>:COUNt. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweeps.
Page 804 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON Switches on the function. CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:REFerence:AUTO ONCE This command sets the currently measured average value (CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:MEAN[:STATe]) and RMS value (CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS[:STATe]) as reference...
Page 805 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Time Domain Power (zero span)" on page 224 "Time Domain Power" on page 296 Retrieving Measurement Results The following commands analyze and retrieve measurement results for time domain power measurements.
Page 806 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON Switches on the function. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON Switches on the average value calculation. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN:AVER:RES? Outputs the result.
Page 807 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Return values: <MeanPower> Mean power of the signal during the measurement time. Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:MEAN ON Switches on the function.
Page 808 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <m> Selects the marker. Return values: <PeakPower> Peak power of the signal during the measurement time. Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PPE ON Switches on the function. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:AVER ON Switches on the calculation of average.
Page 809 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweeps.
Page 810 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweeps.
Page 811 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:RMS:RESult? This command queries the RMS time domain power. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result. This is only possible for single sweeps.
Page 812 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:SDEViation:AVERage:RESult? This command queries the average standard deviation of the time domain power. The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:SUMMary:AVERage. To get a valid result, you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza- tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result.
Page 813 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON Switches on the function. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:PHOL ON Switches on the peak value measurement. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV:PHOL:RES? Outputs the result.
Page 814 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:SUMM:SDEV ON Switches on the measurement of the standard deviation. Manual operation: "Std Dev" on page 296 11.5.1.13 Measuring the Pulse Power The commands of this subsystem are used to determine the mean burst power or peak burst power for a given number of signal bursts, and for outputting the results in a list.
Page 815 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ● Setting up the instrument and querying the result list after synchronization to the end of measurement: With this method the control computer can be used for other activities while the instrument is performing the measurement at the cost of addi- tional time needed for synchronization via service request.
Page 816 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]MPOWer:RESult:MIN? This command queries the lowest pulse power that has been measured during a pulse power measurement. If there are no results, the command returns an error. Return values: <PulsePower> Lowest power level of the pulse power measurement.
Page 817 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode The function is only available in the REMOTE operation. It is deactivated on switching back to LOCAL. Parameters: <Frequency> Defines the pulse frequency. Range: 0 Hz to fmax <RBW> Defines the resolution bandwidth. Range: 10 Hz to 10 MHz in steps of 1, 3, 10 <MeasTime>...
Page 818 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: Sample setting: SENSe:MPOWer 935.2MHz,1MHz,434us,VIDEO,50PCT, 5us,MEAN,20 Performs a measurement sequence with the following settings: Frequency = 935.2 MHz, Resolution bandwidth = 1 MHz Measurement time = 434 µs Trigger source = VIDEO Trigger threshold = 50 % Trigger offset = 5 µs Type of measurement = MEAN power...
Page 819 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ● Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement: With this method, the control computer may be used for other activities while the measurement is being performed. However, more time is needed for synchroniza- tion via service request.
Page 820 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]LIST:POWer[:SEQuence] <Frequency>,<RefLevel>,<RfAtt>,<ElAtt>,<FilterType>,<RBW>,<VBW>,<Meas Time>,<TriggerLevel> This command configures and initiates the List Evaluation measurement. The list can contain up to 200 entries (frequencies). You can define a different instru- ment setup for each frequency that is in the list. If you synchronize the measurement with *OPC, the R&S ESR produces a service request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual mea- surements has been performed.
Page 821 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <VBW> Defines the video bandwidth for a list entry. The value is ignored for <filter type> = "CFILter" or "RRC" Range: 1 Hz to 10 MHz in 1, 3, 10 steps <MeasTime>...
Page 822 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: SENSe:LIST:POWer 935.2 MHz,0dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,440us, 935.4 MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz, 440us,0, 935.6 MHz,0dBm,10dB,20dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz, 440us,0 Performs a measurement sequence with the settings described Table 11-23. SENSe:LIST:POWer? 935.2 MHz,0dBm,10dB,OFF,NORM,1 MHz,3 MHz,440us, 935.4 MHz,0dBm,10dB,10dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz, 440us,0, 935.6 MHz,0dBm,10dB,20dB,CFIL,30 kHz,100 kHz,...
Page 823 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <AVGPower> ON | OFF Turns average power evaluation on and off. *RST: <TriggerSource> IMMediate | EXTernal | VIDeo | IFPower | RFPower Selects a trigger source. For more information see "Trg/Gate Source"...
Page 824 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode PROBe:ID:PARTnumber? This command returns the material part number of the connected probe. Example: PROB:ID:PART? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Part number" on page 387 PROBe:ID:SRNumber? This command returns the serial number of the connected probe. Example: PROB:ID:SRN? Usage:...
Page 825 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode PROBe[:STATe] <State> This command activates a connected probe. Use this command to switch off the probe and measure the digital input without considering the transducer factor of the probe. Parameters: <State>...
Page 826 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <Frequency> Range: 0 to fmax *RST: fmax/2 Default unit: Hz is specified in the data sheet. min span is 10 Hz (SEM and Spurious: min span = 20 Hz) Example: FREQ:CENT 100 MHz Manual operation:...
Page 827 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:LINK:FACTor <Factor> This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth. Parameters: <Factor> Range: 1 to 100 *RST: Default unit: PCT FREQ:CENT:STEP:LINK:FACT 20PCT...
Page 828 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <Offset> Range: -100 GHz to 100 GHz *RST: 0 Hz Default unit: Hz Example: FREQ:OFFS 1GHZ Manual operation: "Frequency Offset" on page 347 [SENSe:]FREQuency:STARt <Frequency> This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain. Parameters: <Frequency>...
Page 829 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Tracking Signals ........826 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth ............ 826 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe] ..........827 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold ............ 827 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:TRACe CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:BANDwidth|BWIDth <Bandwidth> This command defines the bandwidth around the center frequency that is included in the signal tracking process. Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command (CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]).
Page 830 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack:THReshold <Level> This command defines a threshold above which the signal is tracked. Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command (CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:STRack[:STATe]). The unit depends on CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer. Suffix: <n>...
Page 831 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]ADJust:ALL This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current measurement. Example: ADJ:ALL Manual operation: "Auto All" on page 357 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer <Threshold> This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the refer- ence level is automatically adjusted when the "Auto Level"...
Page 832 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <Duration> <numeric value> in seconds Range: 0.001 to 16000.0 *RST: 0.001 Default unit: s Example: ADJ:CONF:LEV:DUR:5 Manual operation: "Meas Time Manual" on page 358 [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFigure:LEVel:DURation:MODE <Mode> This command selects the way the R&S ESR determines the length of the measure- ment that is performed while determining the ideal reference level.
Page 833 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Auto Freq" on page 357 [SENSe:]ADJust:LEVel This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure- ment. You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted, see [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:UPPer [SENSe:]ADJust:CONFiguration:HYSTeresis:LOWer.
Page 834 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution]:FFT <FilterMode> This command defines the filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size. The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis. This command is only available for sweep type "FFT".
Page 835 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <Bandwidth> refer to data sheet *RST: (AUTO is set to ON) Example: BAND:VID 10 kHz Manual operation: "Video BW Manual" on page 361 [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO <State> This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW. to define the ratio VBW/RBW.
Page 836 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]BANDwidth|BWIDth:VIDeo:TYPE <Mode> This command selects the position of the video filter in the signal path. Parameters: <Mode> LINear The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier. In linear mode, measurements with a logarithmic level scale result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode.
Page 837 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> irrelevant Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. DISP:WIND:TRAC:MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging. SWE:COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps. INIT;*WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps. INIT:CONM;*WAI Continues the measurement (next 20 sequences) and waits for the end.
Page 838 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]SWEep:TIME <Time> This command defines the sweep time. The range depends on the frequency span. If this command is used in "Spectrum" mode, automatic coupling to resolution band- width and video bandwidth is switched off. Parameters: <Time>...
Page 839 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: SWE:TYPE FFT Selects FFT sweeps. Manual operation: "Sweep" on page 359 "FFT" on page 359 "Auto" on page 359 [SENSe:]SWEep:TYPE:USED? This command queries the sweep type if you have turned on automatic selection of the sweep type.
Page 840 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <Delay> Range: zero span: -sweeptime (see data sheet) to 30 s; span: 0 to 30 s *RST: Example: TRIG:HOLD 500us Manual operation: "Trigger Offset" on page 378 TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:IFPower:HOLDoff <Value> This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event.
Page 841 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <TriggerLevel> Range: 0.5 V to 3.5 V *RST: 1.4 V Example: TRIG:LEV 2V TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:LEVel:IFPower <TriggerLevel> This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event.
Page 842 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Video" on page 186 "Trg/Gate Level" on page 377 "Trigger Level" on page 472 TRIGger<n>[:SEQuence]:SLOPe <Type> This command selects the slope of the trigger signal. The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources.
Page 843 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode MASK Selects the frequency mask trigger. TDTRigger Selects the time domain trigger. TIME Selects the time trigger. VIDeo Selects the video trigger. The video trigger is available for time domain measurements. *RST: IMMediate Example:...
Page 844 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ..................842 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity ................... 842 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:SOURce ..................843 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe <State> This command switches on/off the sweep control by an external gate signal. If the external gate is selected the trigger source is automatically switched to EXTernal as well.
Page 845 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Gate Delay" on page 379 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:LENGth <TimeInterval> This command defines a gate length. Parameters: <TimeInterval> 125 ns to 30 s *RST: 400μs Example: SWE:EGAT:LENG 10ms Manual operation: "Gate Length (Gate Mode Edge)" on page 380 [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:POLarity <Polarity>...
Page 846 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode [SENSe:]SWEep:EGATe:TYPE <Type> This command sets the type of triggering by the external gate signal. A delay between applying the gate signal and the start of recording measured values can be defined, see on page 841.
Page 847 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:UNIT:POWer <Unit> This command selects the unit of the y-axis. The unit applies to all measurement windows. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <Unit> DBM | V | A | W | DBPW | WATT | DBUV | DBMV | VOLT | DBUA | AMPere *RST: Example:...
Page 848 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure- ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant. <t> irrelevant Parameters: <Mode> ABSolute absolute scaling of the y-axis RELative relative scaling of the y-axis *RST:...
Page 849 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Ref Level Offset" on page 354 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <Position> This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid.. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <t> irrelevant Parameters: <Position>...
Page 850 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode 11.5.3 Analyzing Spectrum Measurements ● Trace Configuration....................847 ● Spectrogram......................856 ● Limit Lines......................860 ● Markers......................... 861 11.5.3.1 Trace Configuration Commands to configure trace described elsewhere: ● on page 683 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE Commands exclusive in spectrum mode ..............
Page 851 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode (TRACe1-TRACe5) Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1. (TRACe1-TRACe6) Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1. Example: CALC1:MATH (TRACe1 – TRACe2) Selects the subtraction of trace 2 from trace 1. Manual operation: "Trace Math"...
Page 852 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MATH:STAT ON Switches on the trace mathematics. Manual operation: "Trace Math" on page 394 "Trace Math Off" on page 395 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE:HCONtinuous <State> This command defines whether traces in Min Hold, Max Hold and Average mode (see on page 683) are reset after a parameter DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:MODE is changed.
Page 853 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: ON for TRACe1, OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example: DISP:TRAC3 ON Manual operation: "Blank" on page 172 FORMat[:DATA] <Format> This command selects the data format for the data transmitted from the R&S ESR to the controlling computer.
Page 854 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode MMEMory:STORe<n>:TRACe <Trace>, <FileName> This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for- mat. The file format is described in Chapter 6.3.1.6, "ASCII File Export Format", on page 399 The decimal separator (decimal point or comma) for floating-point numerals contained...
Page 855 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: SWE:CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode. AVER:COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16. AVER:STAT ON Switches on the calculation of average. INIT;*WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps. [SENSe:]AVERage<n>[:STATe<Trace>] <State>...
Page 856 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Manual operation: "Lin" on page 393 "Log" on page 393 "Power" on page 394 [SENSe:][WINDow:]DETector<trace>[:FUNCtion] <Function> This command selects the detector for the data acquisition in the selected trace. Suffix: <trace>...
Page 857 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode TRACe<n>:COPY <TraceNumber>, <TraceNumber> This command copies data from one trace to another. Suffix: <n> window; For applications that do not have more than 1 measure- ment window, the suffix <n> is irrelevant. Parameters: <TraceNumber>, TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6,...
Page 858 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Table 11-24: Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have been measured. The number of power levels in the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points. The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set.
Page 859 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode TRACe<n>[:DATA]:X? <TraceNumber> This command reads the x-values of the selected trace. Suffix: <n> 1...4 window; For applications that have only one measurement screen, the suffix is irrelevant. Query parameters: <TraceNumber> TRACE1 | TRACE2 | TRACE3 | TRACE4 | TRACE5 | TRACE6 Trace number Example:...
Page 860 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:SGR:COL GRAY Selects black and white color scheme. Manual operation: "Color Mapping" on page 406 CALCulate<n>:SGRam:CONT <State> This command determines whether the results of the last measurement are deleted before starting a new measurement in single sweep mode.
Page 861 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:SGRam:FRAMe:SELect <Frame> This command selects a specific frame for further analysis. The command is available only if no measurement is running or after a single sweep has ended. Suffix: <n> 1...4 Selects the measurement window.
Page 862 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> 1...4 Selects the measurement window. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:SGR ON Activates the Spectrogram result display. Manual operation: "Spectrogram (On Off)" on page 405 Configuring the Color Map Commands useful to work with markers in the spectrogram described elsewhere: ●...
Page 863 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ● on page 657 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:BELow ● on page 658 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum:NEXT ● on page 658 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:SGRam:Y:MINimum[:PEAK] Using Deltamarkers Commands useful to work with markers in the spectrogram described elsewhere: ● on page 698 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MAXimum:LEFT ●...
Page 864 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:TLINe<Line> <Time> This command defines the position of a time line. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <Line> 1 | 2 Selects the time line. Parameters: <Time> Range: 0 to 30000000000 *RST: (STATe to OFF) Default unit: s Example: CALC:TLIN 10ms...
Page 865 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ● on page 688 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:CSTep ● on page 688 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:ZOOM ● on page 691 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:LEFT ● on page 692 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:NEXT ● on page 692 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum[:PEAK] ● on page 693 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:MAXimum:RIGHt ●...
Page 866 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:LOEXclude <State> This command turns the local oscillator suppression during a peak search on or off. Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> irrelevant Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MARK:LOEX ON Manual operation:...
Page 867 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MARK:MIN:AUTO ON Activates the automatic minimum value search function for marker 1 at the end of each particular sweep. Manual operation: "Auto Max Peak/Auto Min Peak"...
Page 868 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode *RST: POINts CALC:MARK:X:SSIZ STAN Example: Sets the measured value step size. Manual operation: "Stepsize Standard" on page 407 "Stepsize Sweep Points" on page 407 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:Y:PERCent <Probability> This command positions the selected marker to the given probability. If you use the command in combination with a delta marker, that delta marker is turned into a normal marker.
Page 869 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:THR:STAT ON Switches on the threshold line. Manual operation: "Threshold" on page 206 "Search Lim Off" on page 207 DISPlay:MTABle <DisplayMode> This command turns the marker table on and off. Parameters: <DisplayMode>...
Page 870 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode ● on page 702 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:X:RELative? ● on page 703 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:Y ................867 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:MREF <RefMarkerNo> This command defines the reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1. The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference. Suffix: <n>...
Page 871 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:FIXed:RPOint:X <Reference> This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point. The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram. When measuring the phase noise, the command defines the frequency reference for delta marker 2.
Page 872 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <Offset> Level offset that is added to the display of all delta markers. *RST: 0 dB Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y:OFFS 10dB Sets the level offset for the measurement with fixed reference value or the phase-noise measurement to 10 dB.
Page 873 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Signal Count ................870 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt ............870 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency? ............... 871 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:RESolution CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt <State> This command turns the frequency counter at the marker position for marker 1 on and off. The count result is queried with CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:COUNt:FREQuency?. The frequency counter works for one marker only.
Page 874 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Return values: <Frequency> Frequency at the marker position. Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK ON Switches on marker 2. CALC:MARK:COUN ON Activates the frequency counter for marker 1. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
Page 875 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK2 ON Switches on marker 2. CALC:MARK:FUNC:NOIS ON Switches on noise measurement. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end. CALC:MARK2:NOIS:RES? Outputs the noise result of marker 2.
Page 876 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO:AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase-noise measurement. Manual operation: "Ph. Noise Auto Peak Search" on page 419 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:PNOise:RESult? This command queries the result of the phase noise measurement.
Page 877 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:DELT:FUNC:PNO ON Switches on the phase-noise measurement with all delta mark- ers. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz. CALC:DELT:FUNC:FIX:RPO:Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to +30 dBm Manual operation: "Phase Noise On/Off"...
Page 878 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <Duration> Range: 10 ms to 1000 s *RST: Marker demodulation = OFF Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:DEM:HOLD 3s Manual operation: "Mkr Stop Time" on page 420 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:DEModulation:SELect <DemodMode>...
Page 879 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode n dB Down Marker ............876 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown ........876 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:FREQuency? ..........877 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:QFACtor ..........877 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:RESult? ..........878 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:STATe ..........878 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown:TIME? CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:NDBDown <Distance> This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker. The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned n dB below the active reference marker.
Page 880 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <frequency 2> absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the refer- ence marker in Hz Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode. CALC:MARK:FUNC:NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function. INIT;*WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end.
Page 881 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Parameters: <Distance> The result depends on the span. In case of frequency domain measurements, the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz. In case of time domain measurements, the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds.
Page 882 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode <m> irrelevant Return values: <Time> <time 1> absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref- erence marker in seconds <time 2> absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds Example: INIT:CONT OFF...
Page 883 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:ANN:LAB:STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation: "Marker Number" on page 424 CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt? This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search.
Page 884 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <NoMaxima> Range: 1 to 200 Example: INIT:CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT;*WAI Starts measurement and synchronizes to end CALC:MARK:TRAC 1 Sets marker 1 to trace 1 CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT X...
Page 885 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> Selects the measurement window. <m> Selects the marker. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SEAR:AUTO ON Activates marker peak search CALCulate<n>:MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT <SortMode> This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned. Suffix: <n>...
Page 886 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate<n>: on page 882. MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:SORT The number of peaks on the number that has been set with CALCulate<n>: MARKer<m>:FUNCtion:FPEaks:COUNt?.
Page 887 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE 3 Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1 CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:COUN? Queries the number of maxima found CALC:MARK:FUNC:FPE:Y? Queries the levels of the maxima found Usage: Query only Manual operation:...
Page 888 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Return values: <Power> Signal power over the marker bandwidth. Example: Activate the band power marker: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON Select the density mode for the result: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:MODE DENS Query the result: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:RES? Response: 20dBm/Hz Usage:...
Page 889 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BPOW:STAT ON Manual operation: "Band Power On/Off" on page 424 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer:MODE <Mode> This command selects the way the results for a band power delta marker are dis- played. Suffix: <n>...
Page 890 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode <m> irrelevant Parameters: <Span> Numeric value that defines the span in Hz. The maximum span depends on the marker position and R&S FSV model. *RST: 5% of current span Example: CALC:DELT:BPOW:SPAN 20 CALCulate<n>:DELTamarker<m>:FUNCtion:BPOWer[:STATe] <State>...
Page 891 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode ..................895 TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? .....................896 TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe ..................... 896 TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:GAP ..................897 TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:LENGth ................897 TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:NOFgateperiods ................... 897 TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:TYPE .......................898 TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL ....................898 TRACe<n>:IQ[:STATe] ..................... 899 TRACe<n>:IQ:TPISample? CALCulate<n>:FORMat <Format> This command defines the display type of the IQ data. Suffix: <n>...
Page 892 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode Example: CALC4:MARK:SEAR IMAG Manual operation: "Search Settings" on page 469 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TRACe<t>:Y[:SCALe]:RVALue <Value> The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid. Suffix: <n> irrelevant <t> irrelevant Parameters: <Value>...
Page 893 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode TRACe<n>:IQ:RLENgth <NoOfSamples> This command sets the record length for the acquired I/Q data. Increasing the record length automatically also increases the measurement time. Note: Alternatively, you can define the measurement time using the SENS:SWE:TIME command.
Page 894 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode <TriggerSlope> POSitive | NEGative Used trigger slope. *RST: <PretriggerSamp> Defines the trigger offset in terms of pretrigger samples. Nega- tive values correspond to a trigger delay. This value also defines the interval between the trigger signal and the gate edge in samples.
Page 895 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA This command starts a measurement with the settings defined via TRACe<n>:IQ:SET and returns the list of measurement results (I/Q samples) immediately after they are corrected in terms of frequency response. The number of measurement results depends on the settings defined with TRACe<n>:IQ:SET, the output format depends on the settings of the FORMat subsystem.
Page 896 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode Figure 11-5: IQ data formats Note: 512k corresponds to 524288 samples Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <Format> COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair *RST: IQBL For maximum performance, the formats "Compatible" or "IQPair" should be used.
Page 897 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode TRACe<n>:IQ:AVERage:COUNt <NumberSets> This command defines the number of I/Q data sets that are to serve as a basis for averaging. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <NumberSets> 0 to 32767 *RST: Example: TRAC:IQ ON Switches on acquisition of I/Q data.
Page 898 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode TRACe<n>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <OffsetSamples>,<NoOfSamples> This command reads out previously acquired (and frequency response corrected) I/Q data from the memory. Furthermore, the offset related to the start of measurement and the number of I/Q samples are given. Thus, a previously acquired data set can be read out in smaller portions.
Page 899 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode Example: TRAC:IQ:STAT ON Enables acquisition of I/Q data TRAC:IQ:SET NORM,10MHz,32MHz,EXT,POS,100,4096 Measurement configuration: Sample Rate = 32 MHz Trigger Source = External Trigger Slope = Positive Pretrigger Samples = 100 Number of Samples = 4096 INIT;*WAI Starts measurement and wait for sync FORMat REAL,32...
Page 900 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode Parameters: <Samples> <numeric value> Max = MaxPreTriggerSamples * 128 MHz/sample rate pretrigger samples defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SET; sample rate defined by TRACe<n>:IQ:SRATe) Range: 1...Max (samples) *RST: Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:GAP 2 TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe:LENGth <GateLength> Defines the gate length in samples in edge mode.
Page 901 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <Type> LEVel | EDGE *RST: EDGE Example: TRAC:IQ:EGAT:TYPE LEV TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL <State> This command enables or disables the IQ data evaluation mode and is a prerequisite for the IQ Analyzer functions. Before this command can be executed, IQ data acquistion must be enabled (see on page 898).
Page 902 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands in I/Q Analyzer Mode To switch trace display back on, use the command. TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL Note: to enable the evaluation functions of the IQ Analyzer, you must also execute the command TRACe<n>:IQ:EVAL. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <State>...
Page 903 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator SCPI command: TRACE:IQ:EGATE:TYPE EDGE, see TRACe<n>:IQ:EGATe: on page 897 TYPE ● Level triggered recording After a trigger signal, all data is recorded in which the gate signal is set to 1, which means it has exceeded a level.
Page 904 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator ..................902 [SENSe:]CORRection[:STATe] ....................903 SOURce<n>:AM:STATe ....................903 SOURce<n>:DM:STATe ..................... 904 SOURce<n>:FM:DEViation ....................904 SOURce<n>:FM:STATe ................... 905 SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet ............905 SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] ............. 905 SOURce<n>:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet ....................906 SOURce<n>:POWer:MODE .................... 906 SOURce<n>:POWer:STARt .....................907 SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP OUTPut[:STATe] <State>...
Page 905 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Example: INIT:CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation CORR:COLL THR;*WAI Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connec- tion between generator and device input and waits for the sweep end.
Page 906 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator The command is available if a tracking generator is installed and has been turned on. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CORR ON Activates normalization. Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Normalize"...
Page 907 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Example: SOUR2:DM:STAT ON Switches on the external I/Q modulation of the tracking genera- tor for screen B. Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "External I/Q" on page 479 "Modulation OFF" on page 479 "External IQ"...
Page 908 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "External FM" on page 479 "Modulation OFF" on page 479 SOURce<n>:FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset> This command defines a frequency offset of the tracking generator. Frequency-con- verting DUTs can be measured with this setting. External I/Q modulation is switched off, if active.
Page 909 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Parameters: <Offset> Range: -200 dB to +200 dB *RST: Example: SOUR:POW:OFFS -10dB Sets the level offset of the tracking generator to – 20 dBm. Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Power Offset"...
Page 910 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Power Sweep Start" on page 480 SOURce<n>:POWer:STOP <Power> This command defines the stop power of the power sweep. The stop value can be smaller than the start value. Suffix: <n>...
Page 911 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Parameters: <Name> '<name> Example: CORR:TRAN:GEN 'SMU01' Creates the transducer file C:\r_s\instr\trd\SMU01.trd. Manual operation: "Save As Trd Factor" on page 479 SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency <Frequency> This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external tracking generator. This command is only valid for the External Tracking Generator option (R&S FSV-B10).
Page 912 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency[:FACTor]:DENominator <Value> This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator. This command is only valid for the External Tracking Generator option (R&S FSV-B10). Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana- lyzer:...
Page 913 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator <generator> 1 | 2 tracking generator For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only Parameters: <Value> <numeric value> *RST: Example: SOUR:EXT:FREQ:NUM 4" "SOUR:EXT:FREQ:DEN 3" Sets a multiplication factor of 4/3, i.e. the transmit frequency of the generator is 4/3 times the analyzer frequency.
Page 914 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Manual operation: "Generator Frequency (Numerator/Denominator/Offset)" on page 489 SOURce<n>:EXTernal<generator>:FREQuency:SWEep[:STATe] <State> This command activates or deactivates the frequency sweep for the selected genera- tor. This command is requires the optional External Tracking Generator. Suffix: <n>...
Page 915 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Suffix: <n> irrelevant <generator> 1 | 2 tracking generator For Noise Figure measurements (K30): 1 only Parameters: <Source> INTernal the internal reference is used EXTernal the external reference is used; if none is available, an error flag is displayed in the status bar EAUTo the external reference is used as long as it is available, then the...
Page 916 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator Manual operation: "Source RF Internal (On/ Off)" on page 477 SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RDEVice:GENerator<generator>:ADDRess <Number> Changes the IEC/IEEE-bus address of the external tracking generator. This command is only available if the R&S FSV-B10 option (External Tracking Genera- tor) is installed.
Page 917 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Commands to Control the Tracking Generator The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed. While, during GPIB operation, each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa- rately, a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also used.
Page 918 ® Remote Control R&S Common Commands Parameters: <Name> Generator name | NONE *RST: NONE Example: SYST:COMM:RDEV:GEN2:TYPE 'SME02' Selects SME02 as generator 2 Mode: A, NF Manual operation: "Type" on page 490 11.8 Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devi- ces.
Page 919 ® Remote Control R&S Common Commands *CLS Clear status Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer. Usage: Setting only *ESE <Value>...
Page 920 ® Remote Control R&S Common Commands *OPC Operation complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been execu- ted. This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query form writes a "1" into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed.
Page 921 ® Remote Control R&S Common Commands The contents of the status registers are preserved. Resets the status registers. *RST Reset Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the description of commands. The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet. Usage: Setting only *SRE <Contents>...
Page 922 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Note: If you start a self-test remotely, then select the "Local" softkey while the test is still running, the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is completed. In this case, the self-test cannot be aborted. Return values: <ErrorCode>...
Page 923 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration .................... 923 SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume ....................... 923 SYSTem:TIME ....................923 SYSTem:TIME:TSTamp? ......................923 SYSTem:VERSion? ....................924 SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel ...................... 924 SYSTem:DEVice:ID? ......................924 SYSTem:DATE SYSTem:APPLication:SRECovery[:STATe] <State> Controls instrument behavior when switching between measurement applications, e.g. from "Spectrum" to "Analog Demod" and back. If activated, the current instrument settings are stored when you switch to a different application.
Page 924 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Example: SYST:COMP FSP Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Compatibility Mode" on page 514 "Mode Default" on page 515 "Mode R&S FSP" on page 515 "Mode R&S FSU" on page 515 SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate <State> In remote control mode, this command switches on or off the instrument display. If switched on, only the diagrams, traces and display fields are displayed and updated.
Page 925 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration *RST: not reset! SYST:FORM:IDEN LEG Example: Adapts the return value of *IDN? to the R&S FSP/FSU/FSQ fam- ily. Manual operation: "*IDN Format Leg./New" on page 518 SYSTem:KLOCk <State> This command activates the local lockout (remote control) or returns to the local mode. Parameters: <State>...
Page 926 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Usage: Event SYSTem:SHUTdown This command shuts down the instrument. Usage: Event SYSTem:SPEaker:VOLume <Volume> This command defines the volume of the built-in loudspeaker for demodulated signals. Parameters: <Volume> Range: 0 to 1 *RST: Example: SYST:SPE:VOL 0 Switches the loudspeaker to mute.
Page 927 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Usage: Query only SCPI confirmed SYSTem:DISPlay:FPANel <State> This command activates or deactivates the display of the front panel keys on the screen. With the display activated, the instrument can be operated on the screen using the mouse by pressing the corresponding buttons.
Page 928 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration ..................... 926 SYSTem:IDENtify[:STRing] .................... 926 SYSTem:ERRor:CLEar:ALL ....................927 SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? ....................927 SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:BIOSinfo? This command queries the CPU board BIOS version. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Return values: <Version> ASCII string containing the BIOS version, e.g. 47.11. Example: DIAG:SERV:BIOS? Returns the BIOS version.
Page 929 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Return values: <Information> String containing the version of hardware and software compo- nents including the types of licenses for installed firmware options. Usage: Query only SCPI confirmed SYSTem:IDENtify:FACTory Resets the response to the *IDN? query to the default value, e.g. after a user string was defined using the ID String User softkey.
Page 930 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration SYSTem:ERRor:LIST? This command reads all system messages and returns a list of comma separated strings. Each string corresponds to an entry in the table SYSTEM MESSAGES. If the error list is empty, an empty string " is returned. This command is a query and therefore has no *RST value.
Page 931 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration *RST: INST:COUP:ATT ALL Example: Synchronizes the attenuation. INSTrument:COUPle:BANDwidth <State> This command turns synchronization of the resolution bandwidth (and filter type) between measurement channels on and off. Parameters: <State> ALL | 1 Turns on synchronization. NONE | 0 Turns on synchronization.
Page 932 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration INSTrument:COUPle:GAIN <State> This command turns synchronization of the preamplifier configuration between mea- surement channels on and off. Parameters: <State> ALL | 1 Turns on synchronization. NONE | 0 Turns off synchronization. *RST: NONE Example: INST:COUP:GAIN ALL Synchronizes the preamplifier configuration.
Page 933 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration INSTrument:COUPle:PRESel <State> This command turns synchronization of the preselector state between measurement channels on and off. Note that it is not possible to turn off the preselector in receiver mode. Thus, the prese- lector is always turned on when you enter receiver mode. Parameters: <State>...
Page 934 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration 11.9.4 Controlling In- and Ouputs .................. 931 DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce ..................... 931 INPut:PRESelection:STATe ....................931 INPut<ip>:UPORt:STATe ....................932 INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue] ..................... 932 OUTPut:IF[:SOURce] ......................932 OUTPut:TRIGger ....................933 OUTPut:UPORt:STATe ....................933 OUTPut:UPORt[:VALue] DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:NSOurce <State> This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or off.
Page 935 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration ON | 1 User port is switched to INPut OFF | 0 User port is switched to OUTPut *RST: Manual operation: "User Port" on page 187 INPut<ip>:UPORt[:VALue] This command queries the control lines of the user ports. For details see on page 933.
Page 936 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Manual operation: "Trigger Out" on page 384 OUTPut:UPORt:STATe <State> This command toggles the control lines of the user ports for the AUX PORT connector. This 9-pole SUB-D male connector is located on the rear panel of the R&S ESR. Parameters: <State>...
Page 937 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration If the external reference oscillator is selected, the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel of the instrument. Parameters: <Frequency> Range: 1 MHz to 20 MHz ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13 Example: Sets the frequency to 13 MHz. SOUR:EXT:ROSC:EXT:FREQ 13 Usage: SCPI confirmed...
Page 938 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration 11.9.6 Calibrating the R&S ESR ......................935 CALibration:ABORt ......................935 CALibration[:ALL]? .......................935 CALibration:RESult? ......................936 CALibration:STATe ............936 DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:CFRequency ............ 937 DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency ................937 DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] ................. 937 DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:STESt:RESult? ..............938 DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:TEMPerature:FRONt? CALibration:ABORt This command aborts the current calibration routine. Example: CAL:ABORt Aborts calibration.
Page 939 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Return values: <CalibrationData> String containing the calibration data. Example: CAL:RES? would return, e.g. Total Calibration Status: PASSED, Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 12/07/2004, Time: 16:24:54,Runtime: 00.06 Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Show Align Results" on page 512 CALibration:STATe <State>...
Page 940 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut:PULSed:MCFRequency <Frequency> This command sets the calibration frequency for frequencies greater than 7 GHz. This command only takes effect if a microwave calibration signal is selected for input (DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:INPut[:SELect] on page 937). Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <Frequency>...
Page 941 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Example: DIAG:SERV:STES:RES? would return, e.g.: "Total Selftest Status: PASSED", "Date (dd/mm/yyyy): 09/07/2004 TIME: 16:24:54", "Runtime: 00:06", "... Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Selftest Results" on page 528 DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:TEMPerature:FRONt? This command queries the temperature of the frontend. Parameters: <Temperature>...
Page 942 ® Remote Control R&S System Configuration Manual operation: "Service Function" on page 528 DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:LASTresult? This command queries the results of the most recent service function you have used. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Example: DIAG:SERV:SFUN:LAST? Usage: Query only DIAGnostic<n>:SERVice:SFUNction:RESults:DELete This command deletes the results of the most recent service function you have used. Suffix: <n>...
Page 943 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management Example: SYST:PASS XXXX Usage: Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Password" on page 528 11.10 Data Management ● Managing Data Files..................... 940 ● Saving and Restoring Customized Data............... 945 11.10.1 Managing Data Files .......................940 MMEMory:CATalog? .....................941 MMEMory:CATalog:LONG? ....................942...
Page 944 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management Usage: Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Select File" on page 531 MMEMory:CATalog:LONG? Corresponds to on page 940, but displays extended information MMEMory:CATalog? on the files contained in the current or specified directory. This command is an event and therefore has no *RST value and no query. Query parameters: <Path>...
Page 945 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management MMEMory:CDIRectory <Directory> This command changes the current directory. Parameters: <Directory> <directory_name> <directory_name> DOS path name In addition to the path name, the indication of the directory may contain the drive name. The path name complies with the DOS conventions.
Page 946 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management Manual operation: "Copy" on page 535 MMEMory:DATA <FileName>, [<Block>] This command writes the block data contained in <block> into the file characterized by <file_name>. The delimiter must be set to EOI to obtain error-free data transfer. The associated query command reads the indicated file from the mass memory and transfers it to the remote control computer.
Page 947 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management MMEMory:MDIRectory <Directory> This command creates a new directory. The file name includes indication of the path and may also include the drive name. The path name complies with DOS conventions. Parameters: <Directory> <directory_name> = DOS path name Example: MMEM:MDIR 'C:\R_S\Instr\user' Usage:...
Page 948 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management Manual operation: "Edit Path" on page 534 MMEMory:NAME <FileName> This command defines a destination file for the printout started with the HCOPy[: on page 963 command. In this case the printer output must be IMMediate<1|2>] routed to a file as destination.
Page 949 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management MMEMory:CLEar:ALL This command deletes all instrument configuration files in the current directory. You can select the directory with on page 942. The default MMEMory:CDIRectory directory is C:\R_S\instr\user. Example: MMEM:CLE:ALL Usage: Event MMEMory:CLEar:STATe 1, <FileName> This command deletes the instrument settings file selected by <file_name>.
Page 950 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management Usage: Event Manual operation: "Startup Recall (On/Off)" on page 533 MMEMory:LOAD:STATe 1, <FileName> This command restores and activates an instrument configuration stored in a *.dfl file. Note that files with other formats cannot be loaded with this command. The contents that are reloaded from the file are defined by the last selection made either in the "Save/Recall"...
Page 951 ® Remote Control R&S Data Management Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Save File / Recall File" on page 531 "Recall" on page 532 MMEMory:STORe:IQ:COMM <Description> Defines a description of the export file which is stored with the data and also displayed in the file selection dialog box for I/Q data import and export.
Page 952 ® Remote Control R&S Using Transducers Usage: Event SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Save File / Recall File" on page 531 MMEMory:STORe<n>:STATe:NEXT This command stores the current device settings in a *.dfl file. The file name used in the last saving process is automatically counted up to the next unused name. Suffix: <n>...
Page 953 ® Remote Control R&S Using Transducers Managing a transducer set //Select or create a transducer set CORR:TSET:SEL 'Transducer Set' //Define a comment for the transducer set CORR:TSET:COMM 'Transducer set example' //Define a unit for the transducer set CORR:TSET:UNIT 'DB' //Turn the transducer break on CORR:TSET:BRE ON //Define the first transducer range CORR:TSET:RANG1 150KHZ,1MHZ,'Transducer 1','Transducer 3'...
Page 954 ® Remote Control R&S Using Transducers *RST: Example: "Designing a transducer factor" on page 949. Manual operation: "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor" on page 508 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:ACTive? This command queries the currently active transducer factor. Parameters: <TransducerFactor> String containing the name of the transducer factor. If no transducer factor is active, the string is empty.
Page 955 ® Remote Control R&S Using Transducers Example: "Designing a transducer factor" on page 949. Manual operation: "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor" on page 508 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:DATA <Frequency>,<Level> This command defines the shape of the transducer factor. A transducer factor may contain up to 625 reference values. Each reference value is a combination of a frequency and a level value.
Page 956 ® Remote Control R&S Using Transducers Manual operation: "Defining characteristics of a transducer factor" on page 508 [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect <FileName> This command creates or selects a transducer factor. Parameters: <FileName> String containing the name of the transducer factor. If the name does not exist yet, the R&S ESR creates a trans- ducer factor by that name.
Page 957 ® Remote Control R&S Using Transducers [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:VIEW <State> This command includes or excludes a figure of a transducer factor in the diagram. Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer factor with [SENSe:]CORRection:TRANsducer:SELect. Parameters: <State> ON | OFF *RST: Example: CORR:TRAN:SEL 'FACTOR'...
Page 958 ® Remote Control R&S Using Transducers [SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:COMMent <Comment> This command defines a comment for a transducer set. Before you can use the command, you have to select a transducer set with [SENSe: ]CORRection:TSET:SELect. Parameters: <Comment> String containing the comment. Example: "Managing a transducer set"...
Page 959 ® Remote Control R&S Using Transducers [SENSe:]CORRection:TSET:SELect <FileName> This command creates or selects a transducer set. Parameters: <FileName> String containing the name of the transducer set. If the name does not exist yet, the R&S ESR creates a trans- ducer set by that name. Example: "Managing a transducer set"...
Page 960 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation 11.12 Documentation Table 11-26: CMAP assignment Suffix Description CMAP1 Background CMAP2 Grid CMAP3* Common text CMAP4* Check status OK CMAP5* Check status error CMAP6* Text special 1 CMAP7* Text special 2 CMAP8 Trace 1 CMAP9 Trace 2 CMAP10 Trace 3...
Page 961 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation Suffix Description CMAP32* Table overall (Title Text) CMAP33* Table overall (Title background) CMAP34* Table overall (Text) CMAP35* Table overall (Background) CMAP36* Table value (Title text) CMAP37* Table value (Title background) CMAP38* Table value (Text) CMAP39* Table value (Background) CMAP40 Trace 5...
Page 962 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation HCOPy:ABORt This command aborts a running hardcopy output. Example: HCOP:ABOR Usage: Event SCPI confirmed HCOPy:CMAP<item>:DEFault <ColorSet> This command defines the color scheme for print jobs. Suffix: <item> Selects the display item. For more information see Table 11-26.
Page 963 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation <sat> numeric value saturation of the color Range: 0 to 1 <lum> numeric value brightness of the color Range: 0 to 1 Example: HCOP:CMAP2:HSL 0.3,0.8,1.0 Changes the grid color Usage: SCPI confirmed Manual operation: "Select Object" on page 522 "User Defined Colors"...
Page 964 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation 'SYST:COMM:PRIN' Sends the hardcopy to the printer. You can select the printer with SYSTem:COMMunicate: PRINter:SELect <1|2>. 'SYST:COMM:CLIP' Sends the hardcopy to the clipboard. The format should be WEMF. *RST: SYST:COMM:CLIP Example: SYST:COMM:PRIN:SEL2 'LASER on LPT1' Selects the printer and output medium for device 2.
Page 965 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation WMF | EWMF WINDOWS Metafile and Enhanced Metafile Format: Data formats for output files which can be integrated in corre- sponding programs for documentation purposes at a later time. WMF can only be used for output to a file and EWMF also for the output to the clipboard.
Page 966 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation Example: HCOP:ITEM:WIND:TEXT 'comment' Manual operation: "Comment" on page 545 HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation<1|2> <Orientation> The command selects the format of the printout. The command is only available if the output device is a printer (see HCOPy: on page 960). DESTination<1|2>...
Page 967 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP Selects the data format. HCOP:DEST 'MMEM' Directs the hardcopy to a file. MMEM:NAME 'C:\R_S\instr\user\Print.bmp' Selects the file name. If the file Print.bmp already exists, it is replaced. HCOP Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print.bmp. Example: HCOP:MODE REPort HCOP:DEV:LANG PDF...
Page 968 ® Remote Control R&S Documentation SYSTem:COMMunicate:PRINter:ENUMerate:FIRSt? This command queries the name of the first printer (in the list of printers) available under Windows operating system. The names of other installed printers can be queried with the SYSTem:COMMunicate: command. PRINter:ENUMerate[:NEXT]? If no printer is configured an empty string is output. Return values: <PrinterName>...
Page 969 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports 11.13 Working with Test Reports ● Designing a Test Report Template................ 966 ● Creating a Test Report..................973 ● Deprecated Commands (Test Report)..............976 11.13.1 Designing a Test Report Template ● Selecting the Test Report Contents...............966 ●...
Page 970 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports Manual operation: "Selecting the Test Report Contents" on page 546 Table 11-27: Available <items> in receiver application <Item> Description Default DIAGram Screenshot of the scan results. FRESults Numerical results for the final measurement. HEADer Header made up of several lines of information that is (by default) displayed on each page of the test report.
Page 971 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports <Item> Description Default RESultlist Numerical measurement results. SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement. TDSTamp Date and time of the measurement. TRANsducer Characteristics of the transducer. Table 11-30: Available <items> in real-time application <Item>...
Page 972 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports NEVer The selected header line is displayed on no page of the report. Note that a line that does not contain anything is still displayed in the report as a blank line. If you select NEVer, the line is not dis- played at all.
Page 973 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports to add a value to each HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:TEXT item. to select the condition HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:HEADer:LINE<line>:CONTrol under which each item is shown. Suffix: <line> 1...7 Selects the header line. Parameters: <Title> String containing the title of the item. The default titles are as follows: •...
Page 974 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:LOGO:CONTrol <Repitition> This command selects how often the logo is displayed in the document. Parameters: <Repitition> ALWays The logo is displayed at the top of every page of the report. NEVer The logo is displayed on no page of the report. ONCE The logo is displayed on the first page of each dataset.
Page 975 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports HCOPy:TREPort:TITLe <Title> This command defines the title for the test report as shown on its title page. Parameters: <Title> String containing the title. Example: HCOP:TREP:TITL 'My first test report' Defines a title for a test report. Manual operation: "Defining the Contents of the Title Page"...
Page 976 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:LOAD 'myTemplate' Loads a test report template. Usage: Event HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:TEMPlate:SAVE <Template> This command saves a test report template. Parameters: <Template> String containing the name of the template. Example: HCOP:TREP:ITEM:TEMP:SAVE 'myTemplate' Saves a test report template. Usage: Event 11.13.2 Creating a Test Report...
Page 977 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports 11.13.2.2 Adding and Removing Datasets ....................974 HCOPy:TREPort:APPend ....................974 HCOPy:TREPort:NEW ..................974 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove ...............975 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:SELected HCOPy:TREPort:APPend This command adds the current measurement results to the test report. The saved data depends on the items you have selected with HCOPy:TREPort: on page 966.
Page 978 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:REM 2 Deletes the second dataset from the current test report. Manual operation: "Adding and Removing Datasets" on page 551 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:REMove:SELected This command deletes all selected datasets that are currently part of a test report. Example: HCOP:TREP:TEST:SEL:NONE Deselects all datasets.
Page 979 ® Remote Control R&S Working with Test Reports Manual operation: "Selecting Datasets for the Report" on page 551 HCOPy:TREPort:TEST:SELect:INVert This command inverts the current selection of datasets to be included in the test report. Datasets that have been included in the report before will no longer be part of the report.
Page 980 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration Legacy command Replaced by Comment HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter. TDSTamp:STATe HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM: HCOPy:TREPort:ITEM:SELect Items now selected by the command parameter. TRANsducer:STATe 11.14 Display Configuration ● Controlling Display Elements................977 ● Selecting Items to Store and Restore..............
Page 981 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration DISPlay:CMAP<item>:DEFault <Setting> This command resets the screen colors of all display items to their default settings. Suffix: <item> irrelevant Parameters: <Setting> 1 | 2 Default settings DEFault1 and DEFault2 Example: DISP:CMAP:DEF2 Selects default setting 2 for setting the colors. Usage: Event SCPI confirmed...
Page 982 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration The values set are not changed by *RST. Suffix: <item> Selects the display item. For more information see Table 11-26. Parameters: <Color> BLACk | BLUE | BROWn | GREen | CYAN | RED | MAGenta | YELLow | WHITe | DGRAy | LGRAy | LBLUe | LGREen | LCYan | LRED | LMAGenta Example:...
Page 983 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration Example: DISP:PSAV:HOLD 30 Manual operation: "Display Pwr Save (On/Off)" on page 523 DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] <State> This command switches on or off the power-save mode of the display. With the power- save mode activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the response time (see command).
Page 984 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration Manual operation: "Tool Bar State (On/Off)" on page 520 DISPlay:THEMe:CATalog? This command queries the available themes for the display. Example: DISP:THEMe:CAT? Usage: Query only DISPlay:THEMe:SELect <Theme> This command selects a theme for the screen display. The theme defines the colors used for keys and screen elements, for example.
Page 985 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration Suffix: <n> 1 | 2 window; Channel and adjacent-channel power measurements: Only "1" is allowed as a suffix for the window. Spectrum Emission Mask and Spurious Emissions measure- ments: selects the window that is displayed in full size (if no suffix is defined, "1"...
Page 986 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration <m> 1...2 1: graphic 2: table For applications that do not have subwindows, the suffix <m> is irrelevant. Example: DISP:WIND1:SEL Sets the window 1 active. DISP:WIND1:SUBW2:SEL Sets the focus on the table of window 1. DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TEXT:STATe <State>...
Page 987 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration Manual operation: "Screen Title (On/Off)" on page 520 "Time+Date (On/Off)" on page 520 DISPlay[:WINDow<n>]:TIME:FORMat <Format> This command selects the time and date display format. Suffix: <n> irrelevant Parameters: <Format> US | DE *RST: Example: DISP:TIME ON Switches the screen display of date and time on.
Page 988 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:ALL This command includes all data subsets in the list of device settings to be stored/ loaded. Example: MMEM:SEL:ALL Usage: Event Manual operation: "Enable all Items" on page 532 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:DEFault This command includes the default list in the settings file to be stored/loaded. For details on hardware settings refer to the MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:HWSettings on page 985 command.
Page 989 ® Remote Control R&S Display Configuration Example: MMEM:SEL:LIN:ALL ON Manual operation: "Select Items" on page 531 MMEMory:SELect[:ITEM]:NONE This command excludes all items from the settings file to be stored/loaded. Example: MMEM:SEL:NONE Usage: Event Manual operation: "Disable all Items" on page 532 MMEMory:SEL[:ITEM]:SGRam <State>...
Page 990 ® Remote Control R&S Network Connection MMEMory:USER<Softkey> <Filename>, <Label> This command defines the settings file to be loaded when the specified user-definable softkey is selected. The settings file must exist, otherwise an error occurs. Suffix: <Softkey> 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 Number of the softkey in the "User"...
Page 991 ® Remote Control R&S Network Connection Parameters: <Drive> Example: MMEM:NETW:DISC 'T:' Disconnects network drive T: Usage: Event Manual operation: "Disconnect Network Drive" on page 536 MMEMory:NETWork:MAP <Drive>, <HostName> [, <UserName>, <Password>][, <Reconnect>] This command maps a drive to a server or server directory of the network. Note that you have to allow sharing for a server or folder in Microsoft networks first.
Page 992 ® Remote Control R&S Network Connection MMEMory:NETWork:USEDdrives? <ResultType> This command lists all mapped network drives. Query parameters: <ResultType> Lists all mapped network drives including the folder information. Lists all mapped network drive names. *RST: Example: MMEM:NETW:USED? ON Lists all mapped network drives including the folder information. Usage: Query only Manual operation:...
Page 993 ® Remote Control R&S Network Connection SYSTem:LXI:INFo? This query returns the current parameters of the LXI class C. Only user accounts with administrator rights are able to use LXI functionality. Return values: Return values <current version> | <LXI class> | <Computername> | (example) <MAC adress>...
Page 994 ® Remote Control R&S Network Connection 11.15.2 Emulating HP Instruments .................... 991 SYSTem:REVision:FACTory .................... 991 SYSTem:REVision[:STRing] ....................... 992 SYSTem:RSW .......................992 SYSTem:LANGuage ..................... 992 SYSTem:HPCoupling ....................993 SYSTem:IFGain:MODE ......................993 SYSTem:TWALking SYSTem:REVision:FACTory Resets the response to the REV? query to the default value, e.g. after a user string was defined using the command.
Page 995 ® Remote Control R&S Network Connection Manual operation: "REV String User" on page 517 SYSTem:RSW <State> Controls a repeated sweep of the E1 and MKPK HI/HL HP model commands (for details on the commands refer to Chapter 11.18, "GPIB Commands of HP Models 856xE, 8566A/B, 8568A/B and 8594E", on page 1039).
Page 996 ® Remote Control R&S Network Connection For FSP (=FSV), the standard parameter coupling of the instrument is used. As a result, in most cases a shorter sweeptime is used than in case of HP. This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem:LANGuage Parameters: <CouplingType>...
Page 997 ® Remote Control R&S Status Register ENHanced If subsequent commands are not found on the same tree level as the previous command, the SCPI parser searches "back- wards up the tree" of defined SCPI commands. If the command is found at a higher node, that command is used. Only if the command is not found anywhere, an error message is returned.
Page 998 ® Remote Control R&S Status Register STATus:PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENABle parts of all registers to a defined value. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh, i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are detec- ted. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected.
Page 999 ® Remote Control R&S Status Register STATus:OPERation:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:ACPLimit:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<n>:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:LMARgin<n>:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:CONDition? STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:CONDition? These commands read out the CONDition section of the status register. The commands do not delete the contents of the EVENt section. Usage: Query only 11.16.4 Controlling the ENABle Part For more information on the enable part see Chapter 11.1.6.2, "Structure of a SCPI Status...
Page 1000 ® Remote Control R&S Remote Control – Programming Examples STATus:QUEStionable:POWer:NTRansition <SumBit> STATus:QUEStionable:TRANsducer:NTRansition <SumBit> These commands control the Negative TRansition part of a register. Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis- ter.

This manual is also suitable for:

Esr-b50 Esr-k53 Esr3 Esr7 Fsv-b9 Esr-k56 ... Show all

R&S ESR Series User Manual

1 Preface

2 Documentation Overview

3 Quick Start

4 Measurement Modes

5 Receiver Mode

Quick Links

Related Manuals for R&S ESR Series

Summary of Contents for R&S ESR Series

This manual is also suitable for:

Table of Contents